JP6485838B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is something that was configured. Furthermore, variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information is provided, and a predetermined game value is given to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means is a specific display result. There is something that was done.

  The winning value means that a winning ball is paid out or a score or a prize is given in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is easy to win, For example, a right to be advantageous to the player can be generated, or a condition for paying out a winning ball can be easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, when a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of a variable symbol special display started by the variable display means based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening , "Big hit" occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number of big prize openings, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number. In addition, the opening time is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  Some of these gaming machines are configured to include a special area that is different from a predetermined area through which game media can pass, and a special entry section that can be entered after the game medium passes through the special area. For example, Patent Document 1 includes a special winning opening where a game ball is entered as a trigger for paying out a winning ball, and a large entrance with a design and function as a pseudo large winning opening. It is described that the entrance is provided at a position where a game ball entered into the special prize entrance can enter. In addition, when the big entrance is closed, game balls that entered the special prize entrance pass through the front of the big entrance without going into the big entrance, and flow directly to the out entrance. Is described.

JP2015-58194A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the game medium that has not entered the special entry portion is discharged from the normal discharge region at the lowermost part of the gaming machine board surface. It may be confused with game media that is discharged without passing through or entering the area, and may cause misunderstanding that the player has lost.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress misunderstanding that a player has lost money.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), and executes variable display of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) in a predetermined direction. Variable display means (for example, the image display device 5) and notice effect execution means for executing the notice effect (for example, full screen notice effect) (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the processes of steps S322A and S344A). And a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect, a predetermined area (for example, a first start winning port, a second start winning port, etc.) through which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can pass, and a game medium pass A special area (for example, a normal winning gate 33, etc.) different from a possible predetermined area, a special entry part (for example, a variable pitching device 43, etc.) that can be entered after the game medium passes through the special area, and the special area Through It was but and a special discharge area for discharging the game medium has not entered into the special entry portion, if the predetermined region game media passes, the game medium is applied with a variable display is started, When the game medium passes through the special area, the variable display is not started, while the game medium is given, and the notice effect execution means cannot visually recognize or difficult to see the display mode of the identification information at the start of the variable display as the notice effect. Can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (B2), FIG. 72 (B2), or FIG. 74 (B2) by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S322A and S344A. When the predetermined notice effect is executed, the variable display means is provided after the execution period of the predetermined notice effect. The variable display of the identification information can be started in the direction (for example, the blackout effect shown in FIG. 70 (B2), FIG. 72 (B2), or FIG. 74 (B2) by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S322A. 70 (D2), (E2), FIG. 72 (D), (E), or FIG. 74 (D2) starts to change the decorative pattern in the forward direction after the elapse of the execution period of FIG. The specific effect execution means can execute the specific effect in a display area common to the predetermined notice effect, and can execute the specific effect at a first timing when the predetermined notice effect is executed. The specific effect can be executed at a second timing different from the first timing when the predetermined notice effect is not executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress misunderstanding that the player has lost money.

  (2) The gaming machine of (1) above further includes a normal discharge area (for example, the first out port 41) different from the special discharge area, and the special discharge area is special compared to the normal discharge area. (E.g., as shown in FIG. 2, compared to the first out port 41 provided below the game area, as shown in FIG. 2, in the winning combination 50 close to the variable pitching device 43. For example, it may be configured to be discharged from the provided second out port 42). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear that there is no loss to the player.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the special entry portion is in a state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can enter when controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a big hit game state). Etc.) may be configured so as to be formed as a variable approach device (for example, a variable pitching device 43). According to such a structure, the interest at the time of being controlled by the predetermined state can be improved.

  (4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), a first state in which a game medium can be won (for example, an open state) and a second state in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to win ( For example, a variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball apparatus 7) that can be changed to a closed state or the like, and a variable winning means that is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player are changed to the first state. A state in which a game medium can enter the variable winning means control means (for example, the part for executing steps S1414 and S1465 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the special entry part (for example, the variable pitching device 43). For example, special approach part control means (for example, steps S1912, S2924, S in the production control microcomputer 200) that change between an open state and an inaccessible state. And the special entry portion control means can change the special entry portion into a state in which the game medium can enter according to a cycle similar to the cycle in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state. (For example, the production control microcomputer 200 executes steps S1901 Y, S1912 and S3902 Y, S3944, so that the flag for opening the big winning opening is set (the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is The variable pitching device 43 is controlled to the open state based on the fact that the flag is set to the open state, and the flag after opening the big prize opening is set by executing Y and S2924 in steps S2901 (special variable prize) Even if it is configured to control the variable pitching device 43 to the closed state based on the fact that the ball device 7 is controlled to the closed state) There. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the period in which the special entry portion changes to a state in which a game medium can enter.

  (5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4), a first state in which a game medium can be won (for example, an open state) and a second state in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to win ( For example, a variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball apparatus 7) that can be changed to a closed state or the like, and a variable winning means that is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player are changed to the first state. A state in which a game medium can enter the variable winning means control means (for example, the part for executing steps S1414 and S1465 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the special entry part (for example, the variable pitching device 43). For example, special approach part control means (for example, steps S1912, S2924, S in the production control microcomputer 200) that change between an open state and an inaccessible state. The variable winning means control means changes the variable winning means to the first state, and then wins at least a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls, etc.) of game media in the variable winning means. Based on this, the variable winning means can be controlled to the second state (for example, the microcomputer 100 for game control shifts to the process of step S1465 when Y in step S1462), and the special approach unit control means is Even if a predetermined number of game media enter the special entry portion after changing the special entry portion into a state in which the game medium can enter, the special entry portion is not controlled to change into a state in which the game medium cannot enter ( For example, in the in-round processing shown in FIG. 37 executed by the effect control microcomputer 200, the determination processing corresponding to step S1462 is not provided, and variable input is performed. By entering the sphere number to the device 43 variable ball entrance device 43 that is not provided the process of controlling the closed state or the like) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, there is no limit to the number of game media that can enter the special approach portion, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (6) In the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (5) above, a first state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can win, and a game medium that is difficult to win or Variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) etc.) that can be changed to an impossible second state (for example, closed state), and a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) A unit game (for example, round) in which the variable winning means can be changed to the first state until at least one of elapse of time or a predetermined number of game media (for example, 10 balls, etc.) is achieved. Etc.) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a game state such as a big hit game state) that is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times for a 15R probability variable big hit, 8 times for an 8R probability variable big hit, etc.) Control microcomputer 100, a part for executing steps S305 to S307) and a value giving means for giving a predetermined value when a game medium wins the variable winning means (for example, executing step S32 in the game control microcomputer 100) And a notification means (for example, a portion that drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls in the payout control microcomputer) and a notification corresponding to a value that can be given in an advantageous state (for example, , The portion for executing steps S3304A, S3507, and S3939A in the production control microcomputer 200) and the specific state corresponding to the notification (for example, “0” display, etc.), the game medium wins the variable winning means. Status display means for executing a status display that changes when the In the microcomputer 200, and the state display means is in a state in which when a certain number of game media wins a predetermined number more than a predetermined number in one unit game in the advantageous state, the state display means The change in display may be limited (for example, the production control microcomputer 200 may not change the state display when Y in step S3920). According to such a configuration, in order to limit the change when a predetermined number of game media are awarded to the variable winning means, the amount of value notified as being grantable and the value actually given As a result, it is possible to prevent a contradiction from occurring in the magnitude of the notified value.

  (7) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (6), the variable display means can execute variable display of identification information in a normal direction as a predetermined direction (for example, FIG. 70 (D1), (D2), (E1), and (E2) may be configured as shown in FIG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

  (8) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (7), the notice effect execution means is an effect suggesting an expected degree of an advantageous state as a predetermined notice effect, and a part of the identification information or An effect of hiding the whole can be executed (for example, the full screen notice effect is more easily displayed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss as shown in FIG. 64 (B), and the entire decorative design is hidden. It may be configured so as to produce an aspect (see FIG. 70 (B2)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

  (9) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (8), the variable display means can variably display the identification information in a specific direction (for example, reverse direction) different from the predetermined direction. (For example, the decoration control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S322C and S345B variably displays the decorative symbols in the reverse direction different from the forward direction, as shown in FIGS. 70B1 and 72B1. Etc.). According to such a configuration, the direction of variable display becomes diversified, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  (10) In the gaming machine of (9) above, the variable display means can execute variable display of identification information in a specific direction at least during the execution period of a predetermined notice effect (for example, FIG. 69 (B)). 76, at least during the execution period of the full screen notice effect, the decorative design may be variably displayed in the reverse direction. According to such a configuration, after the identification information is variably displayed in a specific direction, it can be variably displayed in a predetermined direction different from the specific direction, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  (11) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (10), the notice effect execution means can execute the identification information notice as the notice effect at the start of variable display in a predetermined direction (for example, step) The effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S322B and S345 may be configured such that the symbol notice effect can be executed as shown in FIGS. 70 (B1) and 74 (B1). According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by executing the identification information notice.

  (12) In the gaming machine of the above (11), the notice effect execution means can execute the identification information notice after the end of the predetermined notice effect when executing the identification information notice and the predetermined notice effect ( For example, as shown in FIG. 70 (D2) and FIG. 74 (D2) after the full-screen notice effect shown in FIG. 70 (C2) and FIG. 74 (C2) is finished by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S322D. (E.g., performing a symbol notice effect). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the identification information notice and the predetermined notice effect from being executed simultaneously at the same time, and the identification information notice is not visible or difficult to see due to the predetermined notice effect. Can be prevented.

  (13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12) above, an adjusting means capable of adjusting the effect according to the adjusting operation (for example, adjusting operation) by the player at least during execution of the variable display. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S706 and S707) and an adjustment image (for example, the adjustment result image R shown in FIGS. 75B to 75D) corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment unit. Adjustment image display means for displaying for a predetermined period (for example, predetermined period T1) (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing the processes of steps S708, S703, and S704). When the variable display result is derived and displayed in the period, the adjustment image is not visually recognized during the period during which the variable display result is derived and displayed (for example, the derived display period T2). (For example, the production control CPU 120 executes the processes of steps S710 to S712, etc.) or it is difficult to view (for example, the adjustment image is displayed semi-transparently or blinked). Good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result that is derived and displayed.

  (14) In the gaming machine of the above (13), the adjustment image display means can display the adjustment image so as to overlap with at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result (for example, see FIG. 60A). , May be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, the adjustment image result image that overlaps at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result is erased, so that a reduction in the visibility of the variable display result can be suppressed.

  (15) The gaming machine according to (13) or (14) further includes error image display means for displaying an error image, and the error image display means can display the error image even during the derivation display of the variable display result. (For example, refer to FIG. 60D2). According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

  (16) In any one of the above gaming machines (13) to (15), the error image display means can display the error image in preference to the display of the adjustment image (for example, in the process of step S57, The effect control CPU 120 that has received the abnormality notification command is configured to continue displaying the error image as shown in FIGS. 60D1 and 60D2 until the error indicated by the command is resolved. May be. According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

  (17) The gaming machine according to any one of (13) to (16) further includes demo display means for executing a demo display, and the demo display means is adjusted by the player during the execution of the demo display. However, the demonstration display is continued (see, for example, FIG. 60B), and when the player performs a menu display operation during the execution of the demonstration display, the demonstration display is interrupted (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control). , Executing the processes of steps S659, S660, and S662). According to such a configuration, a demonstration display can be suitably performed.

  (18) In any one of the above gaming machines (13) to (17), specific effect execution means for displaying a specific effect image during execution of variable display of identification information (for example, the character display process for change effect in step S162) The specific effect executing means can arrange the specific effect image at a position overlapping at least ahead of a part of the identification information (for example, FIG. 58 (B)). In the period in which the variable display result of the identification information is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image at the position overlapping the front side of the identification information is set to the static mode (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control performs step S609). The part which performs a process etc.) may be comprised. According to such a configuration, erroneous recognition of the display result can be prevented.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine of a 1st embodiment from the front. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a winning combination. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the decoration design prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the presentation control command which the microcomputer for game control transmits. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the presentation control command which the microcomputer for game control transmits. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening pre-processing in special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special prize process opening process in a special symbol process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process in the special symbol process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of the decoration symbol in an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol fluctuation | variation stop process in an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball alerting | reporting start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a notification pattern determination lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot display process in an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the process in round in an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the round post process in an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the round post process in an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the round post process in an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end effect process in an effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the image display apparatus in this Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of a normal winning acquisition display. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the second embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss. It is a figure which shows the setting example of various commands. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern in embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the character display process for a change effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific setting which displays various images. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of an adjustment result image. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the display period of an adjustment result image, and the derivation display period of a variable display result. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of a full screen notice effect setting process, (B) is a figure which shows the example of determination of a full screen notice effect. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a symbol notice effect setting process, (B) is a figure showing a decision example of a symbol notice effect, and (C) is a figure showing a decision example of a type of a symbol notice effect. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of a symbol reverse direction start display setting process, (B) is a figure which shows the example of a determination of a symbol reverse direction start display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a symbol notice effect timing adjustment process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation | variation of a decoration design and each notice effect, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation | variation of a decoration design and each notice effect, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation | variation of a decoration design and each notice effect, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a figure which shows the example of production production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the change of the decoration design of modification 1, each notice effect, etc. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the design reverse direction start display setting process of the modification 2, (B) is a figure which shows the example of determination of the classification of the design reverse start display of the modification 2. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation | variation of the decoration pattern of the modification 3, each notice effect, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of execution production of the modification 3.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a gaming machine frame 3 attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame formed in a frame shape that is provided on the gaming machine frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. The gaming machine frame 3 is a structure that includes a front frame that is openable and closable with respect to an outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanical components and the like are attached, and various components that are attached to the mechanical plates.

  There is a ball supply tray on the lower surface of the glass door frame. Under the hitting ball supply tray, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray, and a hitting operation handle for firing the hit ball. Moreover, the game board 2 is attached to the back surface of a glass door frame so that attachment or detachment is possible. The game board 2 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 2 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, on the front surface of the game board 2, a game area is formed in which a game ball that has been driven can flow down.

  For example, a stick controller 31A is attached to the member that forms the surplus ball tray, which is configured in a stick shape, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body, and can be tilted in multiple directions by the player. It has been. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button 221 that allows a predetermined instruction operation by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger while the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operating hand. In addition, a trigger sensor 225 for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation on the trigger button 221 or the like is built in the operation rod of the stick controller 31A. In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 223 that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower pan main body or the like below the stick controller 31A. Further, the stick controller 31A includes a vibrator motor 126 for causing the stick controller 31A to vibrate.

  The member forming the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided with, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35B that detects the player's operation act on the push button 31B only needs to be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 31 </ b> B and the stick controller 31 </ b> A are in a vertical positional relationship in the center portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of push button 31B and stick controller 31A as the position put to either the right or left in an upper plate and a lower plate, maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment position of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A is not in a vertical positional relationship, but may be in a horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  An image display device 5 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area. The display screen of the image display device 5 has a decorative symbol display area for performing variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the image display device 5 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of decorative symbols. The decorative symbol display area includes a decorative symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative symbols “left”, “middle”, and “right”. There are “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas in the decorative symbol display area, but the position of the decorative symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the image display device 5. However, the three areas of the decorative symbol display area may be separated. The image display device 5 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display device 4A is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the image display device 5 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display device 4A executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display device 4B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. .

  Further, in the image display device 5, a symbol other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol is continuously stopped for a predetermined time, stopped, oscillated, enlarged / reduced or deformed in a state where it matches the jackpot symbol, or a plurality of symbols Reach effect that is performed in the state where the possibility of big hits continues before the final result is displayed because the symbols of the same symbol fluctuate synchronously or the position of the display symbol is switched That's it. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “lost”, and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a decorative pattern variation display is performed as an effect of liquid crystal display in the image display device 5, but the effect performed in the image display device 5 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the jackpot determination or the change pattern determination result. For example, in addition to performing a battle production where professional wrestling and soccer matches and enemy characters fight, if it is a big hit, it will produce a victory for the game or battle, and if it is a loss, it will produce an effect to defeat the game or battle. Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result of winning or losing or the like, it is possible to execute an effect such that a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the image display device 5, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 5 </ b> A and 5 </ b> B for displaying a fourth symbol after a decorative symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol which will be described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. However, in the case of performing an effect using the image display device 5, for example, an effect including a decorative symbol variation display. There are various effects such as an effect that the content disappears for a moment from the screen, and an effect that the movable object shields all or a part of the screen. For this reason, even when looking at the display screen on the image display device 5, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not it is currently in a variable display state. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the current variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 5A for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 5B for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation of the 4th symbol is realized by continuing the state where the 4th symbol display areas 5A and 5B are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the start point and end point of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same.

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, it is displayed in a display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol. For example, when it is lost, it is displayed in blue, whereas when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. Also, the display color may be different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win a big winning opening, and if it is possible to control multiple types of big hits with different numbers of rounds, The display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the game. In addition, even if the number of rounds per jackpot is the same, for example, the jackpot for which the winning opening per round is short and the game ball can not be expected to actually win the winning jack, If there is a long open time for the big prize opening and there is a big hit that can be expected to actually win a game ball to the big prize opening, whether or not you can actually expect to win a game ball to the big prize opening The display color may be varied depending on the situation. In addition, for example, when there is a big hit that cannot be expected and a big hit that cannot be expected due to the difference in the number of times the big winning opening is opened per round, The display color may be varied depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win the mouth.

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, it is displayed in a display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol. For example, when it is lost, it is displayed in blue, whereas when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. Also, the display color may be different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win a big winning opening, and if it is possible to control multiple types of big hits with different numbers of rounds, The display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the game. In addition, even if the number of rounds per jackpot is the same, for example, the jackpot for which the winning opening per round is short and the game ball can not be expected to actually win the winning jack, If there is a long open time for the big prize opening and there is a big hit that can be expected to actually win a game ball to the big prize opening, whether or not you can actually expect to win a game ball to the big prize opening The display color may be varied depending on the situation. In addition, for example, when there is a big hit that cannot be expected and a big hit that cannot be expected due to the difference in the number of times the big winning opening is opened per round, The display color may be varied depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win the mouth.

  The display colors when the fourth symbol display areas 5A and 5B are turned off are desirably different from the background images in order to prevent the display colors from being assimilated with the background images when they are turned off.

  In this embodiment, a case where the fourth symbol display area is provided in a part of the display screen of the image display device 5 is shown. However, a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the image display device 5. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation of the fourth pattern may be realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately lit, depending on which of the two LEDs is stopped and displayed. You may make it represent whether the big hit symbol was stopped and displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate 4th symbol display areas 5A and 5B are provided corresponding to the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, respectively, but the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol are shown. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the image display device 5. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be executed by distinguishing and displaying the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the right side of the image display device 5, there is provided a first special symbol display device 4A that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A is realized by a simple and small display capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display device 4A is configured to variably display numbers 0 to 9. A second special symbol display device 4B that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information is also provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The second special symbol display device 4B is realized by a simple and small display capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display device 4B is configured to variably display numbers 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same, but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display, for example, a number from 00 to 99.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display device.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display device.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started based on the fact that the variable display start condition is satisfied after the first start condition or the second start condition that is the variable display execution condition is satisfied, When the variable display time elapses, the display result is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a winning opening or a gate, and that the gaming ball has entered the winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result means that the symbol is finally stopped and displayed.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A having a first start winning opening is provided. The game ball won in the first start winning opening is led to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the first start opening switch 22A.

  Also, below the normal winning ball apparatus 6A having the first start winning opening 13, there is provided an ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B having a second starting winning opening capable of winning a game ball. The game ball that won the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the second start opening switch 22B. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened by a solenoid 81. When the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second start winning opening, which is advantageous to the player. In a state where the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning opening than the first starting winning opening. Further, in a state where the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening. Therefore, in a state where the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning opening than the second starting winning opening. In addition, in the state in which the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the closed state, the winning may be difficult, but it may be configured to be possible to win.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the normal variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the normal variable winning ball device 6B is very easy to win the second start winning port. The first start winning opening is provided immediately below the image display device 5, but the interval between the lower end of the image display device 5 and the first starting winning opening is further narrowed, or around the first start winning opening. The nails are arranged densely, or the nail arrangement around the first start winning opening is difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning opening, and the winning rate of the second starting winning opening is started first. You may make it make it higher than the winning rate of a winning opening.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening is provided. However, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are provided. The configuration may be such that a variable winning ball apparatus that performs an opening / closing operation is provided for any of the winning openings.

  Above the second special symbol display device 4B, there is provided a second hold indicator 25B comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening, that is, the second reserved memory number. Yes. The second hold indicator 25B increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Each time variable display on the second special symbol display device 4B is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, a first hold indicator 25A comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening, that is, the first hold memory number, is provided above the second hold indicator 25B. It has been. The first hold indicator 25A increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display device 4A is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display unit 5HL for displaying the first hold memory number and a second hold display unit 5HR for displaying the second hold memory number are provided. . An area for displaying the total number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may be provided. As described above, if the summation pending storage display unit for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  The image display device 5 serves as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Variable display of decorative designs. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5 are synchronized. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, a decorative symbol that reminds the jackpot on the image display device 5 The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes an opening / closing plate, and is specified when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Controlled to gaming state. The specific display result is a predetermined display result. For example, in the present embodiment, there is a jackpot symbol. The specific game state is to change the variable winning means that can be changed between the first state advantageous to the player and the second state unfavorable to the player to the first state. There is a big hit gaming state in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 that can be changed to a closed state is opened. For example, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the specific display result, the big hit game state is controlled as the specific game state. In each specific game state, the open / closed version that is in the closed state is controlled to be in the open state by the solenoid 82, so that the large winning opening that becomes the winning area is in the open state. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a winning combination 50 is provided on the right side of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning combination 50. As shown in FIG. 2, an opening 50a through which a game ball can enter is provided on the top of the winning combination 50, and a normal winning gate 33 is provided in the opening 50a. A game ball that has passed through the normal winning gate 33 is detected by the winning gate switch 33a. In this embodiment, when a game ball passes through the normal winning gate 33 and is detected by the winning gate switch 33a, three prize balls are paid out.

  In the winning combination 50, a variable pitching device 43 is provided below the normal winning gate 33. The variable pitching device 43 includes an opening / closing member 24 that can slide in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 1, and the solenoid 17 causes the opening / closing member 24 to slide backward as viewed from the front of the gaming machine 1. Then, the variable pitching device 43 is controlled to be in an open state, and a game ball can enter the variable pitching device 43. Therefore, in this embodiment, the variable pitching device 43 can be controlled to the open state in a manner similar to the special variable winning ball device 7. It is to be noted that both the variable pitching device 43 and the special variable winning ball device 7 are opened in the same manner by controlling both the open state by the opening operation of the opening / closing plate and the open state by both sliding operations. You may comprise so that control to a state is possible.

  The variable entrance device 43 is provided with an entrance LED 43A. In this embodiment, when the variable entrance device 43 is controlled to be in the open state, the entrance LED 43A is turned on and the variable entrance LED 43A is turned on. It is easy to recognize that the device 43 is controlled to be in the open state. For example, when the variable pitching device 43 is controlled to be in the open state, the variable pitching device 43 is controlled to be in the open state on the display screen of the image display device 5. In order to make it easier to recognize that the variable pitching device 43 is controlled to be in the open state by displaying a display indicating that this has occurred or by outputting a predetermined effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Good.

  FIG. 2A shows a state where the variable pitching device 43 is controlled to be closed in the winning combination 50. As shown in FIG. 2A, when the variable pitching device 43 is controlled to be closed, the game ball that has entered from the opening 50a of the winning combination 50 passes through the normal winning gate 33. It is not possible to enter the variable entrance device 43. Since the opening / closing member 24 at the top of the variable pitching device 43 is formed obliquely in such a manner that it is slightly lowered from the right to the left, the game ball that has fallen on the opening / closing member 24 at the top of the variable pitching device 43 is As shown in FIG. 2A, the opening and closing member 24 is guided leftward. A second out port 42 different from the first out port 41 described later is provided inside the left side of the winning combination 50, and as shown in FIG. The guided game ball is guided to the second out port 42 from the opening 44 provided on the left side wall of the winning combination 50 and is discharged into the gaming machine 1. The second outer opening 25 is provided inside the winning combination 50 in an invisible manner when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 1, and the opening 44 is provided on the side wall of the winning combination 50 and is perpendicular to the front of the gaming machine 1. Since it is difficult to see from the front direction, it is difficult to recognize that the game ball is discharged from the second out port 42.

  FIG. 2B shows a state where the variable pitching device 43 is controlled in the open state in the winning combination 50. As shown in FIG. 2B, when the variable winning device 43 is controlled to be in an open state, the game ball that has entered from the opening 50a of the winning combination 50 has passed through the normal winning gate 33. Further, it is possible to enter the variable entrance device 43. A game ball that has entered the variable ball entry device 43 is detected by the ball detection switch 19. However, in this embodiment, even when a game ball enters the variable ball entry device 43 and is detected by the ball detection switch 19, only the normal winning acquisition display is executed as described later, and the payout of the winning ball is performed. Is not done.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the variable pitching device 43 is also controlled to be opened at the same timing as the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be open during the big hit game. Therefore, in this embodiment, during the big hit game, there is a case where the variable pitching device 43 is in an open state and can enter the ball, and when the game ball enters the variable pitching device 43, the normal winning acquisition display is performed. Then, it is notified that a normal winning has occurred and a winning ball has been obtained separately from the winning ball for winning in the big winning opening. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the case of a big hit game, the player who performed the launch operation aiming at the right side of the game area will display the normal winning acquisition display in addition to the winning to the big winning opening, The player performs a launch operation aiming at the right side of the game area.

  In this embodiment, the winning ball itself is not generated by entering the variable entering device 43 but by passing through the normal winning gate 33, so that the game area is not controlled during the big hit game. If the launch operation is performed aiming at the right side, the game ball passes through the normal winning gate 33 and a certain amount of prize balls are obtained. Therefore, for example, if a sensor or the like is provided on the right side of the game area and a right-handed operation is detected when it is not controlled during a big hit game, a warning display or a left-handed operation suggesting left It is desirable that the player be prompted to perform a left-handed operation by performing a hit notification.

  As described with reference to FIG. 2, in this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the normal winning gate 33 but does not enter the variable winning ball device 22, the gaming ball is changed to the variable ball entering device. It is configured so that it is difficult to recognize that the game ball is discharged from the second out port 42 disposed in the vicinity of 43 and the game ball is discharged. With this configuration, in this embodiment, misunderstanding that the player has lost is prevented from being misunderstood. Specifically, for example, a game ball that has passed through the normal winning gate 33 but did not enter the variable winning ball device 22 falls down and is discharged from the normal first out port 41. In other words, the route to the first out port 41 is long, and the first out port 41 is provided with an opening so that the first out port 41 is easy to see from the front. Will be recognized by the player. However, since three game balls have already been paid out because the game balls have already passed through the normal winning gate 33, there is no actual loss to the player. Therefore, if it is recognized that the game balls that have passed through the normal winning gate 33 are discharged from the out port, the number of game balls discharged from the normal first out port 41 can be seen to be large. Therefore, there is a risk of misunderstanding that the player has lost money. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game balls that have passed through the normal winning gate 33 but have not entered the variable winning ball device 22 are discharged from the second out port 42 that is difficult to see. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused with the game ball discharged from the normal first out port 41 and to prevent misunderstanding that the player has lost the game.

  In addition, the aspect of the 2nd out port 42 is not restricted to what was shown in this embodiment. If the position is closer to the variable pitching device 43 than the first pitching port 41, for example, a second outport is provided in the bottom portion of the winning combination 50 below the variable pitching device 43, and the winning combination The game ball may be discharged from the second out port provided in the bottom portion of 50. Even in such a configuration, if the second out port is provided in the bottom portion of the winning combination 50, it is perpendicular to the front of the gaming machine 1 and is difficult to see from the front direction. It can be difficult to recognize that the game ball is discharged.

  In addition, for example, by providing a decorative member in front of the second out port, the second out port may be made difficult to see, so that it is difficult to recognize that the game ball is discharged from the second out port. . Further, for example, by reducing the size of the opening of the second out port as compared with the first out port, it may be difficult to recognize that the game ball is discharged from the second out port. . It suffices if the second out port is configured in a manner that is less visible to the player than the first out port in some form.

  In addition, a discharge path for discharging the game ball that has entered the variable pitching device 43 to the back side of the board surface of the game board 2 and a game ball that has entered the second out port 42 are discharged to the back side of the board surface of the game board 2. The discharge path to be used may be connected and shared on the back side of the board surface of the game board 2, or may be provided as a separate and independent discharge path.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a normal symbol display 20 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 20 is realized by a simple and small display capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 20 is configured to variably display numbers 0 to 9. Moreover, the small display is formed in, for example, a square shape. In addition, the normal symbol display device 20 may be configured to variably display a number from 00 to 99, for example. Further, the normal symbol display 20 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, and may be constituted by a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display, for example.

  When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, variable display of the normal symbol display 20 is started. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is a predetermined symbol, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time. In other words, the state of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B changes from a disadvantageous state to a player to an advantageous state when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 20, there is provided a general symbol holding display 25 </ b> C having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the passing gate 41. Each time there is a passing of a game ball to the passing gate 41, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the usual figure hold display device 25C increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 20 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, in the probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 20 becomes a winning symbol is increased and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. May shift to a high base state in which the opening time and the number of times of opening are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 2, there is a first out port 41 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 8L and 8R that emit sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper and lower left and outer sides outside the game area. On the outer periphery of the game area, a game effect lamp 9 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The gaming machine is provided with a ball striking device that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating a ball striking operation handle, and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a game ball into the gaming area. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area, and then descends the game area. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening and is detected by the first start opening switch 22A, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first special symbol display device 4A displays the first special symbol. The variable display is started, and the decorative display variable display is started in the image display device 5. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second start winning opening and is detected by the second start port switch 22B, the second special symbol display device 4B can display the second special symbol if the variable special symbol display can be started. The variable display is started, and the decorative display variable display is started in the image display device 5. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit is achieved, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game base is controlled so that the game ball is easily started and won. Transition to the state. In the case of the high base state, for example, compared with the case of not being in the high base state, the frequency with which the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state is increased or the time in which the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state is increased. It becomes easier to win the start-up.

  In addition, instead of extending the time during which the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the open state, the normal symbol display 20 is shifted to the normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 20 becomes a winning symbol is increased. You may move to. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 20 becomes a predetermined symbol, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 20 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the normal variable winning ball device 6B are increased, and it becomes easy to make a start winning. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol, which is disadvantageous for the player. Changes to an advantageous state. It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 20 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is won increases, the frequency that the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the open state increases, and it becomes easy to make a start winning.

  In addition, the transition time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened by shifting to a shorter time when the variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened. Thus, it is possible to reduce the situation where an invalid start prize is generated. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, it may be made easier to make a start winning by shifting to all the above-described states. Moreover, you may make it easy to make a start winning by shifting to any one of the states shown above. Further, it may be made easier to make a start winning by shifting to any one of the states described above.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in the main board 11. FIG. 3 also shows the control board 37, the effect control board 12, and the like. A game control microcomputer 100 that controls the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 11. The game control microcomputer 100 includes a ROM 101 that stores a game control program and the like, a RAM 102 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 103 that performs control operations according to the program, and an I / O 105. In this embodiment, the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 are built in the game control microcomputer 100. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may include at least the CPU 103 and the RAM 102, and the ROM 101 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O 105 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 100 further includes a random number circuit 100 that generates hardware random numbers.

  The RAM 102 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is saved for a predetermined period. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 102 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 101. Therefore, what the CPU 103 executes in the following is specifically controlled by the CPU 103 according to the program. Is to execute. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 11.

  The random number circuit 100 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 100 updates the numerical data in accordance with the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value and the upper limit value are set, and the start winning time generated at random timing is the time of reading the numerical data. Based on this, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 100 has various functions such as a numerical data update range selection setting function, a numerical data update rule selection setting function, and a numerical data update rule selection switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 100. For example, numerical data obtained by performing a predetermined calculation using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 100 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 101 is used as an initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 100. Set. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 100 can be further improved.

  Further, a switch circuit 110 for providing the game control microcomputer 100 with detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the winning gate switch 33a is also mounted on the main board 11. Has been. In addition, a solenoid circuit 111 for driving a solenoid 81 for opening / closing the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a solenoid 82 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 forming a large winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 100 is also mainly used. It is mounted on the substrate 11.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 includes a first special symbol display device 4A that variably displays special symbols, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first hold indicator 25A. The second hold indicator 25B and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C are controlled to be displayed.

  An information output circuit 64 for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 11.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 12 receives an effect control command for instructing the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 100 via the relay board 15, and variably displays the decorative symbols. Display control of the image display device 5 to be performed is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 12 is connected to the game effect lamp 9 provided on the frame side via the lamp control board 14 and the entrance LED 43A provided to the variable entrance device 43. And the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled via the sound control board 13.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 15, the effect control board 12, the lamp control board 14, and the sound control board 13. In the example shown in FIG. 4, the lamp control board 14 and the voice control board 13 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp control board 14 and the sound control board 13, only the effect control board 12 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 200 including an effect control CPU 120 and a RAM for storing information related to effects such as decorative symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 200 is not backed up. In the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM, and an input driver in accordance with a capture signal from the main board 11 input via the relay board 15. An effect control command is received via 202 and the input port 203. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the VDP 109 to perform display control of the image display device 5 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the image display device 5 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 200 is mounted on the effect control board 12. The VDP 109 has an address space independent from the effect control microcomputer 200, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the image display device 5 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM to the VDP 109 in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM is a ROM for storing character image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, and background image data in advance. The VDP 109 reads out image data from the CGROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 120. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 202 on the effect control board 12. The input driver 202 is also a unidirectional circuit as a signal direction regulating means that allows a signal input from the relay board 15 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 12.

  On the relay board 15, a unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted as a signal direction regulating means that allows a signal input from the main board 11 to pass only in a direction toward the effect control board 12. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 4 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 11 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 15 toward the inside of the main board 11 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 15 does not enter the main board 11. The output port 571 is a part of the I / O 105 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 221 of the stick controller 31 </ b> A has been detected from the trigger sensor 225 via the input port 206. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 31B has been detected from the push sensor 35B via the input port 208. Further, the effect control CPU 120 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 223 via the input port 207. . Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 205 to cause the stick controller 31A to vibrate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 inputs a detection signal from the entrance detection switch 19 indicating that a game ball has entered the variable entrance device 43 via the input port 207. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the drive signal to the solenoid 17 via the output port 205 to control the variable pitching device 43 to the open state.

  In this embodiment, the detection signal from the entrance detection switch 19 is input to the production control microcomputer 200 side. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the game control microcomputer 100 side. You may comprise so that it may input into. In this case, when the game control microcomputer 100 receives the detection signal from the ball detection switch 19, a command indicating that the detection signal from the ball detection switch 19 has been input is sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. The presentation control microcomputer 200 may be controlled to display a normal winning acquisition display described later based on the reception of the command.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp control board 14 via the output port 205. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the sound number data to the sound control board 13 via the output port 204.

  In the lamp control board 14, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies current to light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the entrance LED 43A based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice control board 13, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a predetermined period in time series. In addition, when the voice synthesis IC 703 receives a predetermined request from the effect control board 12, the voice synthesis IC 703 generates a voice and outputs the voice to the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the CPU 103 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine and the reset signal to the gaming control microcomputer 100 becoming high level. It is. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value of the specific register of the game control microcomputer 100 and the interrupt vector output from the built-in device is set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 103 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (step S5). By the processing in step S5, the CTC and PIO that are built-in devices are set.

  The game control microcomputer 100 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port and a timer / counter circuit 504.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 in an accessible state (step S6), and proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  Note that a software delay process for delaying the start timing of the game apparatus control process for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the main board 11 with respect to the other control board.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S7). Note that the CPU 103 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is an off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time, the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch is not on in step S7, it is confirmed whether or not the data protection processing of the backup RAM area has been performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, a process for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 103 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 103 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process depending on the execution of the power supply stop process. It is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 103 performs data check on the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, the clear data is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 103 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as a checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage or the like, the check result becomes normal because the data in the backup RAM area should be stored. That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 103 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the head address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S42). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before power supply is stopped, an area where the output state of the output port is stored, a part where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, etc. is there.

  Further, the CPU 103 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S43). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102. Also, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a winning ball flag, a ball-out flag, etc. are selectively selected according to the control state. An initial value is set in a flag for processing.

  Further, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). As the initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Further, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing for initial setting of the random number circuit 100 (step S15).

  Then, the CPU 103 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (step S16). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every 4 ms.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 103 first disables the interrupt (step S17), executes the initial value random number update process (step S18a) and the display random number update process (step S18b), and interrupts again. The permission state is set (step S19). That is, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, and sets the interrupt enabled state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are finished. .

  The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value such as a counter for generating a determination random number for determining the type of jackpot. In a game control process described later, when the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one round, an initial value is set in the counter.

  The display random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B. In this embodiment, as a display random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol, or a random number for determining a reach for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated, is used. Used. The display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.

  The reason why the interrupt is disabled when the display random number update process is executed is that the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are also executed in the timer interrupt process described later. This is to avoid competing with the processing in. That is, if a timer interrupt occurs during the processing of steps S18a and S18b and the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, Continuity may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt is disabled during the processing of steps S18a and S18b.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, in a period in which the interrupt is permitted during the execution of the loop process of steps S17 to S19, the CPU 103 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 causes the timer interrupt to occur. Executes timer interrupt processing that is activated in response to the occurrence of In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (step S20). And CPU103 inputs the detection signal of switches, such as the gate switch 21, the 1st starting port switch 22A, the 2nd starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the prize gate switch 33a, via the switch circuit 58, and each switch Is detected (switch processing: step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes display control processing for performing display control of the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the special symbol reservation storage display device 18, and the general symbol reservation display device 25C (step S22). For the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B and the normal symbol display 20, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S36 and S37.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning notification process for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning in the special winning opening and notifying the abnormality (step S24).

  After step S24, the CPU 103 performs processing for updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control (determination random number update processing: step S25). ). Further, the CPU 103 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number (initial value random number update process: step S26). Further, the CPU 103 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (display random number update process: step S27).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs special symbol process processing (step S28). In the special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S29). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 20 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to the decorative symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol to the effect control microcomputer 200 (decorative symbol command control process: step S30). Note that the fact that the variation of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time is the same.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs information output processing for outputting data such as a start port signal, a symbol determination number 1 signal, a symbol determination number 2 signal, a jackpot 1 to 3 signal, a time reduction signal, and the like supplied to the hall management computer. (Step S31).

  Further, the CPU 103 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the winning gate switch 33a (step S32). . Specifically, it is mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on one of the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the winning gate switch 33a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of winning balls is output to the payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In the present embodiment, when the first start port switch 22A or the second start port switch 22B is turned on, a payout control command in which one prize ball is set is output, and the payout control command is The received payout control microcomputer pays out one prize ball. In addition, when the count switch 23 is turned on, a payout control command in which 15 prize balls are set is output, and the payout control microcomputer that has received the payout control command pays 15 prize balls. It is something to be issued. In addition, when the winning gate switch 33a is turned on, a payout control command in which three winning balls are set is output, and the payout control microcomputer that has received the payout control command receives three winning balls. It is something to be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, when a predetermined period elapses or when a winning of 10 game balls is detected in the big winning opening, one round is finished. Since 15 winning balls are paid out when a game ball wins a winning opening, 150 winning balls can be paid out in one round. In other words, 2250 prize balls can be paid out when the 15R probability variation is a big hit, and 1200 prize balls can be paid out when the 8R probability variation is a big hit.

  In addition, a test terminal process, which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed (step S33). In this embodiment, a RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 103 outputs the contents related to the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 0 to the output port (step S34: Output processing). Then, the CPU 103 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of reserved storage (step S35).

  Further, the CPU 103 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data in accordance with the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S36). Further, the CPU 103 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S37).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs a status display lamp display process for setting status display control data for displaying each status display lamp in an output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S38). In this case, when the gaming state is also controlled to the high probability state, the state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp indicating the high probability state may be set in the output buffer. .

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S39), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S39 in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is executed in the main process. You may be made to do.

  When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the image display device 5, the decorative symbol variable display state is started after the decorative symbol variable display is started. May not reach the reach state, and a predetermined combination of decorative symbols that do not become reach may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a “non-reach” variable display mode in a case where the variable display result is a lost pattern.

  When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the image display device 5, the decorative symbol variable display state is started after the decorative symbol variable display is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a predetermined combination of decorative symbols that does not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative pattern is referred to as a “reach” variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the reach effect is executed after the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state. Finally, the decorative symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas in the image display device 5.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of decorative symbols prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach are shown as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative display variable display mode is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, as variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 7, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-4 that is used when the reach is not performed and is accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Further, the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2 used when not reaching is a variation pattern for shortening variation, and the variation time of the decorative design is shortened to a short time. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation is to temporarily execute the variable display of the decorative symbol after temporarily stopping the decorative symbol that is lost until the display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2-3 to normal PA2-4 as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol. Variation patterns of PB2-4, super PA3-3 to super PA3-4, super PB3-3 to super PB3-4 are prepared.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 7, when normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effects, re-variation is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to superPA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, re-variation is performed three times.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the case where the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach is shown, but for example, in the case of the same type of super reach Alternatively, the variation time may be varied according to the total number of pending storage. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, and the determination table is selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number. The variation time may be made different.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows. Random 1: Decide the type of jackpot. Random 2: Determines the type of variation pattern. Random 3: A variation pattern is determined. Random 4: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol. Random 5: The initial value of random 4 is determined.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined by using the variation pattern type determination random number, and the variation pattern type is determined by using any one of the variation pattern types determined by using the variation pattern determination random number. Determine the fluctuation pattern. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence or absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect.

  In step S25 in the game control process shown in FIG. 6, the game control microcomputer 100 counts up a counter for generating a big hit type determination random number and a normal symbol determination random number. That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 100 is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 9A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal big hit determination table used in a normal state and a probable change big hit determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 9 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 9 (A) is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 9A is a jackpot determination value.

  The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 100 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determining random number. The jackpot determining random number is one of the jackpots shown in FIG. 9A. If it matches the judgment value, it will be decided to win a special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 9A indicates the probability of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  FIGS. 9B and 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131 a and 131 b stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 9 (B) is a jackpot type determination table 131a in the case where the jackpot type is determined using the on-hold storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening. FIG. 9C is a jackpot type determination table 131b in the case where the jackpot type is determined using reserved storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b indicate that the jackpot type is determined based on a random number for determining the jackpot type when the variable display result is determined to be a jackpot symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of “big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, in the jackpot type determination table 131a, ten determination values are assigned to “15R probability variable big hit”. A case where 30 determination values are assigned to “15R probability variation big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131b will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, the start winning prize is displayed at the second start winning opening and the second special symbol change display is performed, compared to the case where the first special symbol changing display is executed at the first starting winning opening. In the case where is executed, the ratio determined as “15R probability variation big hit” is higher.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, there are “15R probability variation big hit” and “8R probability variation big hit” as the big hit types. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types of 15 rounds and 8 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is shown in this embodiment. Not limited to those. For example, there may be provided a 10R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 10 round jackpot game, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 7 round jackpot game, and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 5 round jackpot game. In this embodiment, the case where there are two types of jackpot types, “15R probability variation big hit” and “8R probability variation big hit”, is not limited to two types, but, for example, three or more types of jackpot types are provided. You may do it. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than two types, for example, only one type may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “15R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the 15-round big hit gaming state and shifts to the probability changed state after the big hit gaming state ends. Then, until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the probability variation state and the time reduction state continue. Hereinafter, the gaming state controlled to the probability variation state and the short time state may be referred to as “high probability high base state”, and the state that is not controlled to either the probability variation state or the short time state may be referred to as “low probability low base state”. .

  The “8R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the eight-round big hit gaming state and shifts to the probability changed state after the big hit gaming state ends. Then, until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the probability variation state and the time reduction state continue.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with random 1 values, and determination values corresponding to “15R probability variation big hit” and “8R probability variation big hit” are set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matching jackpot type determination value.

  10 and 11 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command for designating a decorative pattern variation pattern variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the special symbol variable display. That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 200 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit. The effect control microcomputer 200 determines the display result of the decorative symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H). Therefore, the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command indicating that variable display of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command indicating that variable display of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command. Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command indicating that the variable display of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 200 ends the variable display of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Command A001 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game.

  Command A1XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. A2XX (H) is an effect control command indicating the closing of the large winning opening for the number of times indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the big prize opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the big prize opening is transmitted for each round.

  Command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, for specifying the end of the big hit game.

  Command A 401 (H) is an effect control command for designating that a game ball has won a big winning opening.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command for designating a background display when the gaming state is in a certain change state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command for designating that the first reserved storage number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command for designating that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command for designating that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command for designating that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  When the effect control microcomputer 200 mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, it is shown in FIGS. 10 and 11. Depending on the contents, the display state of the image display device 5 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the sound control board 13.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 100 designates the decorative pattern variation pattern each time a start winning is made and variable display of the special symbol is started in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE, and the second byte represents EXT. The first bit of MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit of EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the production control command, production control command data is output from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 via the relay board 15 by 1 byte by 8 parallel signal lines of the production control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulsed capture signal that instructs to capture the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 200 mounted on the effect control board 12 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process by an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are used as the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device. It can be used in common with the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the change of the second special symbol in 4B, and for the effect such as the image display device 5 that produces the effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When the components are controlled, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control microcomputer 200 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process processing program executed by the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. As described above, in the special symbol process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the process for controlling the special winning a prize are executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 103 detects the first start port switch 22A for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning port or the game ball has won the second start winning port. If the second start opening switch 22B is turned on, that is, if a start winning to the first start winning opening or a starting winning to the second start winning opening has occurred, the start opening switch passing process is executed ( Steps S311, S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 22B is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing: executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 100 is in a state where variable display of special symbols can be started, the game control microcomputer 100 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer. The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state is updated to a value according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process: executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern is determined to be the variation time of the variable symbol variable display. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing: executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 200 is performed. Then, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation processing: This processing is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200, and the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the image display device 5 so that the fourth symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 is received.

  Special symbol stop process: executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S305. If the big hit flag is not set, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Pre-opening process for big prize opening: executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, the counter and the like are initialized and the solenoid 82 is driven to open the special winning opening. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S306. Note that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is executed for each round, but when the round 1 is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process: This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 200, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S307.

  Big hit end processing: executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the production control microcomputer 200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Also, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in an ON state (step S1211). If the first start port switch 22A is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S1217. If the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (step S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1217.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1213), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 100 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (step S1215). In the process of step S1215, a random R that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number that are software random numbers are extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for variation pattern type determination or the random number for variation pattern determination is not extracted in the start-port switch passing process and stored in the storage area in advance, but may be extracted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. Good. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern type determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern type determination random number or generates a variation pattern determination random number in a variation pattern setting process described later. A value may be directly extracted from a random number counter for variation pattern determination for generation.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of an area for storing a random number or the like corresponding to the hold storage. As shown in FIG. 14, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination A random number is stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1216).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (step S1217). If the second start port switch 22B is not in the ON state, the process is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (step S1218). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1219), and the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1220). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 100 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (step S1221). In the process of step S1221, a random R that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number that are software random numbers are extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the variation pattern determination random number may be extracted at the start of variation of the second special symbol instead of being extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start port switch passing process. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  And CPU103 performs control which transmits the 2nd memory | storage number addition designation | designated command to the microcomputer 200 for presentation control (step S222).

  15 and 16 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S271). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 200 (step S272), and the process is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 103 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S272, the CPU 103 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. If the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo will be repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. What is necessary is just to control not to transmit a designated command. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second pending storage number is 0 (step S273). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “second” in the special symbol pointer (step S274). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S275).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S273 to S275, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step S276). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 determines each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S277). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 stores each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102. And stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is stored in the second reserved memory. Store in the storage area corresponding to number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers are extracted always coincides with the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that.

  Then, the CPU 103 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S278). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 according to the current gaming state (step S279). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating that the probability variation state is set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. Further, if the probability variation flag is not set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  In this embodiment, the background designation command is transmitted every time for each variation. For example, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has changed since the last variation at the start of the variation. Only when the state changes, the background designation command corresponding to the changed gaming state may be transmitted. With such a configuration, the number of transmissions of the background designation command can be reduced, and the processing burden on the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

  Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 200, the CPU 103 sets the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command in the pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the decorative symbol command control process. In this embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the production control microcomputer 200 is in the order of the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the reserved memory count subtraction designation command for each timer interruption. Will be sent to. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, and after another 4 ms elapses. A pending storage count subtraction designation command is transmitted. Note that a symbol variation designation command is also transmitted when starting the variation of the special symbol, but the symbol variation designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 in the same timer interruption as the variation pattern command.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or data indicating“ second ”indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S307 can be shared between the case where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the random R from the random number buffer area and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random number extracted in steps S1215 and S1221 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The big hit determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is in a probable change state, the probability of a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is in a non-probable change state. Specifically, there are provided a probabilistic jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and a normal jackpot determination table in which the number of jackpot determination values is set to be smaller than that in the probabilistic jackpot determination table. ing. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state, and when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When in the gaming state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 9A, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S280), the process proceeds to step S281. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display device as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game, and when it is decided that the big hit, the special symbol variation display is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped. Is reset at the timing to end or 50 times of special symbol variation display.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S280), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S285 as it is.

  In step S281, the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S282). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 9B. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9C.

  Next, using the selected jackpot type determination table, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the value that matches the random number value for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area as the jackpot type (step S283). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot type determination random number extracted in steps S1215 and S1221 of the start port passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer and the second hold memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. .

  Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S284). For example, when the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “8R probability variable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. Is done.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines a stop symbol for the special symbol (step S285). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, “−” which is a lost symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of the big hit symbols is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when “15R probability variation big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “8R probability variation big hit” is determined, “3” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method of determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is It is not restricted to what was shown in embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and when a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S286).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S361). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 determines which of the big hit variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the big hit type. Is selected (step S362). Then, control goes to a step S368.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step S363). The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game, and when it is decided that the big hit, the special symbol variation display is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped. Is reset at the timing when the variable display is completed or 50 times of variable display is completed. If the probability variation flag is set (Y in step S363), the CPU 103 uses a variation pattern type determination table for loss for probability variation as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Select (step S367). Then, control goes to a step S368.

  If the probability variation flag is not set (N in step S363), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (step S364). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S364), the CPU 103 uses a normal variation pattern type determination table for losing as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Is selected (step S365). Then, control goes to a step S368.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S364), the CPU 103 uses as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, for loss when the variation time is shortened. A variation pattern type determination table is selected (step S366). Then, control goes to a step S368.

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S363 to S366, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the loss variation pattern type determination table for reducing the variation time is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the probability variation variation pattern type determination table is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S368, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S369. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a probability variation state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a variation display of the shortening variation may be performed.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the probability variation state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved memories are different tables. A common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for variation.

  Even when the gaming state is in a probable variation state, if the total pending storage number is substantially zero, the variation display of the shortening variation may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 103 determines Y in step S363, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is approximately zero. A determination table may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads random number 2 from the random number buffer area and refers to the table selected in the processing of steps S362, S83, S367, S365, or S366, thereby determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. (Step S368). In the case where the random number 2 is not extracted at the timing of the start winning prize, the CPU 103 directly extracts and extracts the value from the variation pattern type determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern type determination random number. The variation pattern type may be determined based on the random value.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the big hit variation pattern determination table or the loss variation pattern determination table is a table used to determine one of the plurality of types of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S368. One of them is selected (step S369). Also, random number 3 is read from the random number buffer area, and the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S369 (step S370). If the random number 3 is not extracted at the timing of the start winning prize, the CPU 103 directly extracts the value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number, and extracts the extracted random number value. The variation pattern may be determined based on the above.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S371). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit an effect control command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S372).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S373). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S374).

  In the case where it is determined to be lost, the variation pattern type may not be suddenly determined, but first, whether or not to reach may be determined by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S363 to S366 and S368 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach and a variation pattern type determination table for reach are prepared in advance, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result, The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination, a reach determination table having a different reach selection ratio is selected according to the total number of reserved storage, and the number of stored storage It may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability becomes lower as the number increases.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing display result designation command transmission processing. In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit any effect control command from one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 3 designation in accordance with the determined jackpot type and loss. Specifically, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S381). If not set, the process proceeds to step S385. When the big hit flag is set, if the big hit type is “15R probability variation big hit”, control for transmitting a display result 2 designation command is performed (steps S382 and S383). Whether or not it is “15R probability variation big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S284 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. it can. Further, when the big hit type is “8R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S382 and S384). Whether or not it is “8R probability variation big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S284 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. it can.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N of step S381), that is, when it is a loss, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S385).

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S386).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state if it is set (step S132).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S133).

  Further, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot display time in the time measurement timer (step S134). Further, the CPU 103 sets the number of rounds corresponding to the big hit type in the round number counter (step S135). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special prize opening (step S136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step S137). If it is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state, step 103 is performed. The process proceeds to S141. When the probability variation flag is set, that is, when the probability variation state is set, the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S138), and it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is 0 (step S139). . If not 0, the process proceeds to step S141. When it becomes 0, the probability variation flag is reset (step S140), and the process proceeds to step S141. Thus, the transition from the certain change state to the normal state is triggered by a predetermined number of changes. In step S141, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S141).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the time measurement timer by 1 (step S1401). If it is before the start of round 1, the process of step S1401 is executed, and the value of the time measurement timer set in step S134 of the special symbol stop process is measured, so that the start of round 1 The previous jackpot display time will be measured. If it is round 1 or later, the value of the time measurement timer set in step S1469 of the special winning opening opening process to be described later is measured by executing the process of step S1401. Later interval periods will be measured.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot display time and the interval period are measured using a common time measurement timer is shown, but the jackpot display time and the interval period are measured using separate timers. You may comprise.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the count switch 23 has been input (step S1403). When the count switch 23 is turned on, that is, when a game ball won in the grand prize opening is detected (Y in step S1403), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a big prize opening designation command to the production control microcomputer 200 (step S1403). S1404). Then, control goes to a step S1411.

  When the time measurement timer times out (step S1411), the CPU 103 performs control to set the current round number in the EXT data of the special winning opening opening designation command and transmit it to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1412). .

  Next, the CPU 103 initializes a winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening (step S1413). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to zero.

  Next, the CPU 103 controls the special winning opening to be open (step S1414). Specifically, the solenoid 82 is driven to open the special variable winning ball device 7.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the opening time according to the jackpot type and the starting round to the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening (step S1415). In this embodiment, regardless of the type of big hit, the opening time of the big prize opening in all rounds is 29.5 seconds, so in step S1415, the CPU 103 sets the opening time timer to 29.5 seconds. Set the value corresponding to.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S1416).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process in the special symbol process. In the special winning opening opening process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the detection signal from the count switch 23 is input (step S1452). When the count switch 23 is turned on, that is, when a game ball won in the big winning opening is detected (Y in step S1452), the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (step S1453). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a grand prize winning prize designation command to the production control microcomputer 200 (step S1454). Then, control goes to a step S1462.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step S1462). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step S1465. Therefore, in this embodiment, even before the opening period of the grand prize opening has elapsed, if the number of winning prizes in the big prize opening reaches 10, it is determined as Y in step S1462, and step S1465 is performed. There is a case where the round is ended by controlling the special winning opening to be closed.

  If the value of the winning number counter is less than 10 (N in step S1462), the CPU 103 decrements the opening time timer by 1 (step S1463) and checks whether the opening time timer has timed out (step S1464). If the release time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated. If the opening time timer has timed out, the CPU 103 controls the special winning opening to be closed (step S1465). Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 82 is stopped and the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is closed. In addition, the CPU 103 sets the current number of rounds in the EXT data, and performs control to transmit a designation command after opening the big prize opening to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1466).

  Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step S1467) and checks whether the value of the round number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1468). When the value of the round number counter is 0, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to a period for performing the interval effect after the last round in the time measurement timer (step S1471). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S1472).

  If the value of the round number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the interval period in the time measurement timer (step S1469). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S1470).

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S401). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S409. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time measurement timer (step S402).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the count switch 23 has been input (step S403). When the count switch 23 is turned on, that is, when a game ball won in the big winning opening is detected (Y in step S403), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a big winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S403). S404). Then, the process proceeds to step S405.

  By executing the processing of steps S403 to S404, even if it is an interval period after the final round period of the jackpot game is finished, winning in the big winning opening is detected and a big winning opening winning designation command is transmitted. Is possible.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time measurement timer after subtraction has become 0 (step S405). If the value of the time measurement timer is 0, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step S406) and performs control to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step S407). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed in the image display device 5 in the jackpot end display timer (step S408), and ends the process.

  In step S409, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer (step S409). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S410). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S410), the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (step S411). Further, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined number of times in the probability variation counter (step S412).

  Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S413).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control processing program executed by the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, the CPU 103 performs processing for setting or updating the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 103 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable symbol special display. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, whereby the special symbol display device 4A. 4B, the special symbol variation display is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, the CPU 103 outputs special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing as an output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. Is set (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 103 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol. After that, display control processing is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, whereby the special symbol display device 4A. In 4B, the special symbol stop symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201, the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 100 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 200 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 103 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and displays the stop symbol based on the end flag being set. Special symbol display control data for stop display may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing a timer for determining the start interval of the production control, and the like (step S421).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S422). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (step S423) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S424).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (step S425). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the fourth symbol process (step S426). In the 4th symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display area 5A, 5B of the image display device 5 is controlled to display the 4th symbol. Run.

  After step S426, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S427). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S422.

  FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  26 and 27 are flowcharts showing a specific example of command analysis processing. The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes are read out.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received presentation control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the presentation control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S618). ).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been normally received.

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622). In this embodiment, the jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S622 is also referred to as a fanfare flag.

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S624). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S624 is also referred to as an ending flag.

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 120 uses the received special winning opening open designation command in the RAM for a special winning opening open designation command. Store in the storage area (step S626). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a special winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening open designation command has been received (step S627).

  If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (step S628), the CPU 120 for effect control receives the received designation command after opening the big prize opening and is designated after opening the big prize opening in the RAM. Store in the storage area (step S629). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag after opening the special prize opening indicating that the designation command after opening the special prize opening has been received (step S630).

  If the received effect control command is a prize winning prize designation command (step S631), the effect control CPU 120 sets a prize winning flag indicating that a game ball has won a prize winning slot (step S632). .

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S679), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background screen displayed on the image display device 5 to a background screen corresponding to the normal state (step S680).

  If the received effect control command is a probability change state background designation command (step S682), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background screen displayed on the image display device 5 to a background screen corresponding to the probability change state (step S683). ).

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S685), the effect control CPU 120 controls to display a customer waiting demonstration screen on the image display device 5 after 30 seconds (step S687). . Specifically, a timer for measuring 30 seconds is set, and when the timer times out, a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed on the image display device 5. If a variation pattern command or the like is received during measurement, the timer is reset and the measurement is terminated. After step S687, the number of reserved memories stored in each reserved memory number storage area is cleared (step S688).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes a process (step S691). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the effect control process in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the image display device 5 is controlled to realize variable display of decorative symbols, but control related to variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with changes in special symbols is also executed in one effect control process. The decorative display variable display synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the decorative display variable display synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is executed depending on which effect control process processing is performed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process: It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process.

  Decoration symbol variation start processing: Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process.

  Decoration pattern variation processing: Controls the switching timing of each variation state constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process.

  Decoration symbol variation stop processing: Control is performed to stop the variation of the ornament symbol and derive and display the display result. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to either the jackpot display process or the variation pattern command reception waiting process.

  Big hit display processing: When the big hit is reached, after the variation time is over, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. For example, when a fanfare designation command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing.

  In-round processing: Controls display during the round. For example, if a display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, the display control of the number of rounds is performed.

  Post-round processing: Controls display between rounds. For example, when a display command after opening the big winning opening indicating that the big winning opening is after opening is received, the interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing: In the image display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. For example, when an ending designation command for designating the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S813).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines a decorative symbol display result according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S8002). In other words, the processing of step S8002 is executed by the effect control CPU 120, thereby realizing a display result determining means for determining the display result of the variable display of the identification information in accordance with the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means. Is done. When a variation pattern that designates a pseudo-ream is also used and the pseudo-ream is designated by a variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 also displays a chance eye symbol as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8002. decide. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined decorative symbol stop pattern in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decoration symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a decorative symbol stop pattern in the image display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 31, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit”, the effect control CPU 120 has three symbols as the stop symbols in the same design. Determine the combination of decorative designs. That is, the player cannot recognize which jackpot is based on the stop symbol.

  In the case of “losing”, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Further, a combination of three symbols derived and displayed on the image display device 5 is a “stop symbol” of a decorative symbol.

  The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbol and the numerical value are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

  As for the decorative symbol, a stop symbol that recalls a big hit is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect setting process for setting the notice effect (step S8003). Here, for example, whether or not the starting change is a big hit, if it is a big hit, which type of big hit is determined, or whether or not a predetermined notice effect is performed is determined based on the read fluctuation pattern or the like. .

  After step S8003, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect when the change pattern and notice effect are executed (step S8004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8005).

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data that is referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls effect devices such as the image display device 5 in accordance with the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time of the variable display of decorative symbols. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, displays the decorative pattern in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display. Further, the flashing of the light emitter is controlled in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is controlled.

  The process table shown in FIG. 32 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12. The process table is prepared according to the contents of each variation pattern, the notice effect, and the notification effect. If it is decided to execute the notice effect in the process of step S8004 or the like, it is not decided to select the process table in which data corresponding to the notice effect is set and to execute the notice effect. In this case, a process table for which data corresponding to the notice effect is not set is selected.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  After step S8005, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device according to the contents of the process data 1 (step S8006).

  After step S8006, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8007). Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process (step S8008).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stopping process in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a decorative symbol stop symbol is displayed is set (step S861). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S867. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a big hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S866. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset in step S868. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in step S861 is a stage in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, so the process of displaying the decorative symbol stop symbol in step S862. Without moving to step S867.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the stored stop symbol (step S862). The effect control CPU 120 may perform control to stop and display the decorative symbols in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the big win symbol is displayed in step S862 (Y in step S863), the effect control CPU 120 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S866) and checks whether the fanfare flag is set (step S867). . When the fanfare flag is set (Y in step S867), the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S868) and executes a prize ball notification start process for starting a prize ball notification effect. (Step S868A).

  “Prize ball notification effect” means “Prize ball notification” which displays the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out during the fanfare period, and a value corresponding to the prize ball notification. This is an effect including “status display” which is displayed by subtracting the number of prize balls to be paid out each time. For example, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball wins a big prize opening is “15”, so that 2250 prize balls are scheduled to be paid out as prize ball notification. When “2250 GET” is displayed, the status display is switched between “2235”, “2220”, “2205”... Each time one game ball is won.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of 15R probability variation big hit, as a notification pattern in a prize ball notification effect, a pattern for displaying a state by displaying “2250 GET” as a prize ball notification, and “1200 GET” as a prize ball notification. And a status display, and a pattern in which “1050 GET” is added and notified in round 9 is provided. In the case of 8R probability variation big hit, as a notification pattern in the prize ball notification effect, only a pattern for displaying “1200 GET” as the prize ball notification is provided.

  In the present embodiment, button effects can be executed during the fanfare period. The button effect is an effect that can prompt the player to operate the push button 31B and can switch the value displayed as the award ball notification when an operation to the push button 31B is accepted during a predetermined effective period. . Specifically, when the winning hit is 15R, “1200 GET” is displayed as a prize ball notification, and an operation to the push button 31B is accepted in the button effect, the value of the prize ball notification is changed from “1200” to “2250”. Switching is possible. In addition, although the button effect may be executed even if the 8R probability variation big hit, even if the operation to the push button 31B is received during the effective period, the value of the prize ball notification will not be switched. . The number of button effects that can be executed is not limited to one, and the button effects may be executed a plurality of times during the fanfare period or during the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, the player is made to recognize which type of big hit is made by executing a common effect in the case of 15R probability variation big hit and 8R probability variation big hit. It may be difficult. In that case, a promotion effect is performed in round 8, and when it succeeds, it notifies that big hit will continue after round 9, while it notifies that big hit ends in round 8 by failure. Hereinafter, a successful promotion effect may be referred to as a “promotion success effect”, and a failed promotion effect may be referred to as a “promotion failure effect”. In other words, when the 15R probability variable big hit is reached, an effect that makes it difficult for the player to recognize which type of big hit until round 7 is made, and a successful promotion effect can be executed in round 8. On the other hand, in the case of 8R probability variable big hit, an effect that makes it difficult for the player to recognize which type of big hit until round 7 is performed, and a promotion failure effect can be executed in round 8.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S869). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S870), and executes control of the effect device according to the contents of the process data 1 (step S870A). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S871).

  When the big hit symbol is not displayed in step S863 (that is, when the lost symbol is displayed: N in step S863), the effect control CPU 120 resets a predetermined flag (step S864). For example, the effect control CPU 120 resets the command reception flag. The effect control CPU 120 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the 4th symbol process.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S865).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a prize ball notification start process. In the prize ball notification start process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a notification pattern determination lottery for determining a notification pattern in the prize ball notification effect (step S3301). Specifically, the notification pattern in the prize ball notification effect is determined using the notification pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram of a notification pattern determination lottery table. Each notification pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 35 is assigned a determination value corresponding to the notification pattern. However, in the example shown in FIG. 35, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown to simplify the explanation. Has been. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for notification pattern determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  The notification pattern includes information about the pattern name, the display mode of the prize ball surroundings during the fanfare period, the presence / absence of the button effect, and the promotion effect. In addition, as the fanfare display in the notification pattern for executing the button effect, the notification mode before and after the button effect is shown. For example, in the case of Pt2, “1200” is displayed before the button effect is executed, and “2250” is switched after the button effect is executed. For example, in the case of Pt4 and Pt6, “1200” is displayed before the button effect is executed, and “1200” is also displayed after the button effect is executed.

  Pt1 to Pt4 are notification patterns that are selected when the big hit type is 15R probability variable big hit. Pt5 and Pt6 are notification patterns that are selected when the big hit type is 8R probability variation big hit.

  Specifically, Pt1 is a notification pattern for notifying that a 15R probability variation big hit has been made by displaying “2250 GET” as a prize ball notification. Pt2 is a notification pattern for notifying that the 15R probability variation big hit has been made by switching the prize ball notification after the button effect to “2250 GET” and displaying it. Pt3 indicates that there is a possibility of 8R probability variation big hit by displaying “1200 GET” as a prize ball notification without performing a button effect, and then notifies that 15R probability variable big hit has been achieved by performing a successful promotion effect. This is a notification pattern. After Pt3 suggests that there is a possibility that the prize ball notification will not be switched from “1200 GET” even if the button effect is performed, it will be the 8R probability variable big hit, and then it will be notified that the 15R probability variable big hit has been achieved by performing the promotion success effect. This is a notification pattern. Pt5 indicates that there is an 8R probability variable big hit by displaying “1200 GET” as a prize ball notification without performing a button effect, and then notifies that it has become an 8R probability variable big hit by performing a promotion failure effect. This is a notification pattern. After Pt6 suggests the possibility that the prize ball notification will not be switched from “1200 GET” even if the button effect is performed, it is an 8R probability variable big hit, and then notifies that the 8R probability variable big hit has been achieved by performing the promotion failure effect. This is a notification pattern.

  FIG. 35A is an explanatory diagram showing a first notification pattern determination lottery table used in the case of 15R probability variation big hit. For example, in the case of 15R probability variation big hit, the notification pattern is determined at a rate of 40%, Pt2 at a rate of 30%, Pt3 at a rate of 20%, and Pt4 at a rate of 10%. .

  FIG. 35B is an explanatory diagram showing a second notification pattern determination lottery table used in the case of 8R probability variation big hit. For example, in the case of 8R probability variation big hit, the notification pattern is determined at a rate of 30% for Pt5 and a rate of 70% for Pt6.

  In this way, when it is 15R probability variation big hit, it is difficult to select Pt3, and when the value of the prize ball notification in the fanfare period is “1200” without button display, the 15R probability variation big hit is achieved. It has a configuration with low reliability.

  In addition, it is difficult to select Pt4 in the case of 15R probability variation big hit, and it is difficult to select Pt6 in the case of 8R probability variation big hit, so that the value of the prize ball notification in the fanfare period even if the button is displayed. Is “1200”, the reliability for the 15R probability variation big hit is low.

  After step S3301, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the determined notification pattern is Pt1 (step S3302). If it is Pt1, the prize ball notification number S is set to “2250” (step S3301). S3303), the process proceeds to step S3304A. The prize ball notification number S is a value displayed as the number of remaining prize balls scheduled to be paid out. In step S3302, if any of Pt2 to Pt6, the effect control CPU 120 sets “1200” to the number of award balls notified S (step S3304), and proceeds to step S3304A.

  In step S3304A, the effect control CPU 120 executes prize ball notification based on the prize ball notification number S (step S3304A). Specifically, a display such as “2250 GET” is displayed when the prize ball notification number S is “2250”, and a display such as “1200 GET” is displayed when the prize ball notification number S is “1200”. When the prize ball notification number S is the maximum value, a display that does not include a specific value may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the display of the prize ball notification can be switched even when the validity period ends without detecting the operation on the push button 31B in the button effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, when the operation on the push button 31B is not detected until the validity period ends, the display of the prize ball notification may not be switched.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the determined notification pattern is any one of Pt2, Pt4, and Pt6 (step S3305). If it is not any of Pt2, Pt4, and Pt6, the prize ball is notified as it is. End the start process. If it is any of Pt2, Pt4 and Pt6, an effective period flag indicating that the operation of the push button 31B is in effect is set (step S3306), and an operation instruction notification for prompting the operation of the push button 31B is started. (Step S3307), the award ball notification start process is terminated. As the operation instruction notification, in the present embodiment, an image indicating that the operation of the push button 31B is urged is displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined value is given from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound may be output or a light emitting member built in the push button 31B may emit light. In this embodiment, the effective period of the button effect is started from the start of the fanfare period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. After the fanfare period is started and a predetermined period has elapsed, In addition, the effective period may be provided from a predetermined timing after the start of round 1, even before the start of the fanfare period, or at the timing of starting round 1. .

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a jackpot display process in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open display command has been received is set (step S1901). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S1901), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the valid period flag is set (step S3501). The process proceeds to step S1902.

  When the valid period flag is set, the production control CPU 120 has accepted an operation on the push button 31B (Y in step S3502) or when it is the valid period end timing (N in step S3502 and Y in S3503). Then, the effective period flag is reset (step S3504), and it is determined whether or not the notification pattern is Pt2 (step S3505). If it is not Pt2, the process proceeds to step S1902. If it is Pt2, “2250” is set to the prize ball notification number S (step S3506), and a prize ball notification based on the prize ball notification number S is executed (step S3507). Specifically, a display such as “2250 GET” or a display not including a specific value is performed. As a result, the prize ball notification display is switched from “1200 GET” to “2250 GET”.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the button effect can be executed in the jackpot display process, but the button effect may be executed in the decorative symbol variation stop process.

  In step S1902, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1902), and controls the effect device according to the contents of the process data n (step S1903). The process data n is data in the fanfare effect process table selected in step S869, and is the data switched in step S1905 every time the process timer times out.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1905). That is, the process data is switched to the next set process data in the process table. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1906).

  When the big prize opening opening flag is set (Y in step S1901), that is, when the start timing of round 1 is reached, the effect control CPU 120 ends the prize ball notification and also notifies the prize ball. Status display based on the number S is started (step S1907A). Specifically, the status display is performed by displaying the value of the number of award balls S in the lower right of the image display device 5. Since the prize ball notification number S is a value that changes based on the occurrence of winning in the big prize opening, the status display also changes based on the change of the prize ball notification number S. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 resets the special winning opening open flag (step S1907).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the round (step S1908). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts a process timer (step S1909) and executes control of the effect device according to the contents of the process data 1 (step S1910).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 initializes a winning counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the first grand prize opening or the second big prize opening (step S1911). That is, the value of the winning counter is set to zero.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 drives the solenoid 17 to control the variable pitching device 43 to an open state (step S1912). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting of the entrance LED 43A (step S1913).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S1914).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a round process in the effect control process. In the in-round processing, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the flag for opening the big prize opening indicating that the designation command for opening the special prize opening has been received is set (step S2901). When the flag after opening the big prize opening is not set (N in step S2901), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S2902), and controls the effect device according to the contents of the process data n. It executes (step S2903).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S2904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S2905). That is, the process data is switched to the next set process data in the process table. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S2906).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big prize opening prize flag is set (step S2907). If the big prize opening prize flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the big prize opening prize flag (step S2908). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter (step S2909). Further, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts “15” from the prize ball notification number S (step S2910), and changes the state display based on the prize ball notification number S (step S2910A). Specifically, the value displayed as the status display is updated to the value of the number S of prize balls notified after subtraction.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the prize ball notification number S is “0” (step S2911), and if it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2913. If “0”, a special effect of outputting specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is executed (step S2912). Thereby, an uplifting feeling can be given to a player and the improvement of an interest can be aimed at. Further, by executing the effect by sound as the special effect, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case of executing the effect by display.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the incoming ball detection switch 19 is turned on (step S2913). If the entrance detection switch 19 is on, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a normal winning acquisition display on the image display device 5 (step S2914). For example, “+3” or the like is displayed on the image display device 5, and a display for notifying that three prize balls are obtained by passing the game ball of the normal winning gate 33 is performed.

  Note that the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 37 is simplified, but more specifically, as the process of displaying the normal winning acquisition display in step S2914, the turn-on detection switch 19 is detected once. Based on this, for example, control for displaying a normal winning acquisition display for a predetermined period is performed. Specifically, when the turn-on detection switch 19 is detected to be turned on, the image display device 5 starts displaying the normal winning acquisition display and sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period in a predetermined timer. Control may be performed so that the normal winning acquisition display is erased in the image display device when the timer of the timer expires.

  If the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in step S2901 (Y in step S2901), the effect control CPU 120 resets the flag after opening the big prize opening (step S2920).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the interval effect (step S2921). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts a process timer (step S2922) and executes control of the effect device according to the contents of the process data 1 (step S2923).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 stops driving the solenoid 17 and controls the variable pitching device 43 to be closed (step S2924). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the lighting of the entrance LED 43A (step S2925).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806) (step S2926).

  38 to 40 are flowcharts showing round post-processing in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step S3901). When the big hit end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step S3901), the effect control CPU 120 sets the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open designation command has been received. It is confirmed whether or not (step S3902). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S3902), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S3903), and controls the effect device according to the contents of the process data n. It executes (step S3904).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S3905), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S3906). That is, the process data is switched to the next set process data in the process table. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S3907).

  Next, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big winning opening prize flag is set (step S3917). If the big prize opening prize flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the big prize opening prize flag (step S3918). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter (step S3919), and checks whether or not the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more (step S3920). If the value of the winning counter after the addition is not 11 or more, the process proceeds to step S3924.

  If the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more, it is a case where an over winning to the big winning opening has occurred. “Over winning” is, for example, that, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening for each round in the big hit game is determined, but the upper limit is exceeded. A game ball wins a big prize opening. For example, in this embodiment, even if a predetermined opening time has not elapsed in each round during the big hit game, if the tenth winning prize is detected, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. However, if a game ball wins just before the big winning opening is closed, the 11th or 12th win may occur and an over win may occur.

  If the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the informed flag indicating that the occurrence of the over winning has already been notified is set (step S3921). If set, the round post-processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the informed flag is not set, over-winning notification for informing the occurrence of over-winning is performed (step S3922), the informed flag is set (step S3923), and the post-round processing is ended. In step S3922, specifically, the occurrence of an overwinning is notified by causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit light, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the occurrence of an overwinning may be notified using the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member incorporated in the special winning opening. In addition, when a prize is entered into a grand prize opening that is not over-winning, a predetermined LED may be caused to emit white light, and when an over-winning occurs, the predetermined LED may be issued as a rainbow. By performing steps S3920 to S3923, even if two or more balls are over-winning, the over-winning notification is performed only once. Thereby, over-winning notification can be performed without making the player feel bothersome.

  When the value of the winning counter after the addition is not 11 or more, the CPU 120 for effect control subtracts “15” from the number S of notified prize balls (step S3924), and based on the number S of notified prize balls after the subtraction. The status display is changed to a value (step S3924A). Then, it is determined whether or not the prize ball notification number S is “0” (step S 3925), and if it is not “0”, the post-round processing is terminated. If “0”, a special effect of outputting specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is executed (step S3926). Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player that the value notified in the prize ball notification effect has become “0”, and the interest can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, after the round is over, a winning at the big winning opening is detected, and when the winning is not an over winning, the status display is changed and the prize ball notification number S is “0”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a winning is detected after the round, the state display change and the special effect are not executed regardless of whether or not the winning is over. There may be.

  In this embodiment, the number of winning prize winning designation commands received using the prize counter on the side of the production control microcomputer 200 is counted, and the value of the prize counter becomes 11 or more. Although the case where it determines with winning is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may determine whether or not the number of winning prizes at the big winning opening is 11 or more to determine whether or not an over winning has occurred. Then, different grand prize winning prize designation commands are transmitted depending on whether or not they are over prizes, and the production control microcomputer 200 side, based on which major prize winning prize designation command is received, You may comprise so that it may be recognized whether it is an overwinning.

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S3902), the effect control CPU 120 resets the informed flag if it is set (step S3931), and resets the big prize opening open flag. (Step S3932).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the next round to be started is round 8 (step S3932). Whether or not it is round 8 can be determined, for example, by confirming the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command. If the next round to start is round 8, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether the notification pattern is any one of Pt3 to Pt6 (step S3934). If it is any of Pt3 to Pt6, the process table corresponding to the in-round effect including the promotion effect is selected (step S3935). At that time, if the notification pattern is Pt3 or Pt4, the process table corresponding to the in-round effect including the promotion success effect is selected. If the notification pattern is Pt5 or Pt6, the process corresponding to the in-round effect including the promotion failure effect is selected. Select the table. If it is not round 8 in step S3933 or if the notification pattern is Pt1 or Pt2 in step S3934, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the normal round (step S3936).

  In this embodiment, for example, a display in which the teammate character battles the enemy character is performed on the image display device 5 as a promotion effect. In the promotion success effect, the teammate character displays a victory over the enemy character, while in the promotion failure presentation, the teammate character displays a defeat to the enemy character. That is, in the promotion effect, if the teammate character wins the enemy character, it is informed that the jackpot will continue after round 9, while if the teammate character loses to the enemy character, the jackpot ends in round 8. It is to be notified.

  After step S3935 or step S3936, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the next round to be started is round 9 (step S3937). Whether or not it is round 9 can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command. If the next round to be started is round 9, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the notification pattern is Pt3 or Pt4 (step S3938). If it is either Pt3 or Pt4, “1050” is set to the prize ball notification number S (step S3939), a prize ball notification effect based on the new prize ball notification number S is executed, and a new prize ball Status display based on the number of notifications S is started (step S3939A). Specifically, a display such as “1050 GET” is displayed as a prize ball notification, and “1050” is displayed substantially at the lower right of the image display device 5 as a status display.

  In addition, when Pt3 or Pt4 is selected as the notification pattern and “10” or more wins have occurred in each round between round 1 and round 8, “0” is displayed as the status display at the end of round 8. It will be displayed. Therefore, by performing step S3939A in round 9, it is possible to show the player that the status display has been added from “0” to “1050”.

  In the present embodiment, in the round 9 that is the next round in which the promotion success effect is performed, the prize ball notification is performed based on the added number of prize balls notification S, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a prize ball notification such as “1050 GET” may be performed in round 8 in which the promotion success effect is performed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts a process timer (step S3940) and executes control of the effect device according to the contents of the process data 1 (step S3941).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 initializes a winning counter (step S3943). That is, the value of the winning counter is set to zero.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 drives the solenoid 17 to control the variable pitching device 43 to an open state (step S3944). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the entrance LED 43A (step S3945).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S3946).

  When the big hit end designation command reception flag is set in step S3901 (Y in step S3901), the effect control CPU 120 resets the informed flag if it is set (step S3951), and the big hit end designation command reception flag is set. Is reset (step S3952).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the ending effect (step S3953). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the ending period at the end of the big hit game in the effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect executed at the end of the big hit game (step S3954).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts a process timer (step S3955) and executes control of the effect device according to the contents of the process data 1 (step S3956).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S3957).

  In this embodiment, it is based on the fact that the big prize opening opening flag is set in the jackpot display process shown in FIG. 36, the in-round process shown in FIG. 37, and the post-round process shown in FIGS. Thus, the variable pitching device 43 is controlled to be in the open state, and the variable pitching device 43 is controlled to be in the closed state based on the flag set after opening the big prize opening. Therefore, in this embodiment, the variable pitching device 43 is controlled to be in the open state at exactly the same cycle as the cycle in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in the process for opening the big prize opening shown in FIG. 21, when the number of winning game balls to the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 reaches a predetermined number during the big hit game round, While the variable winning ball apparatus 7 is controlled to be in a closed state, such a process is not performed in the round process shown in FIG. 37, and even if the number of game balls that have entered the variable pitching apparatus 43 reaches a predetermined number. The process which controls the variable pitching apparatus 43 to a closed state is not performed. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, since there is no limit to the number of game balls that can enter the variable ball entry device 43, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  It should be noted that the period at which the variable pitching device 43 and the special variable winning ball device 7 are controlled to be in the open state is not necessarily the same. For example, instead of controlling the variable pitching device 43 to the open state in all rounds during the big hit game, a plurality of types of open patterns are provided to control the variable pitching device 43 to the open state only in some rounds. You may comprise so that an open pattern may be provided. In addition, for example, an open pattern may be provided in which the open state of the variable pitching device 43 is maintained during the interval period and the variable pitching device 43 is controlled to be in the open state continuously throughout the big hit game.

  In addition, for example, in a game machine configured to execute a pre-reading notice effect during a big hit game by determining whether there is a big hit in the stored memory during the big hit game, it continues throughout the big hit game Then, by controlling the variable pitching device 43 to the open state with the opening pattern for controlling the variable pitching device 43 to the open state, it is configured to notify that there is a big hit in the stored memory. Also good. Further, for example, in the case where a plurality of types of opening patterns of the variable pitching device 43 are provided, depending on which opening pattern the variable pitching device 43 is controlled to be in the open state, It may be configured such that there are different expectations. In addition, for example, depending on the expectation that there is a big hit in the stored storage, it may be configured to vary the effect executed while the variable pitching device 43 is opened.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step S971). The production period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the big hit game in the post-round processing. Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S972).

  When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S972), the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S973), and performs a process of controlling the production device according to the contents of the process data n. Execute (Step S974). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S975), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S976). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S977).

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S972), the effect control CPU 120 resets a predetermined flag (step S978). For example, the effect control CPU 120 resets command reception flags such as a first symbol variation designation command reception flag and a second symbol variation designation command reception flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S980).

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the image display device 5 in the present embodiment. The display example shown in FIG. 42 shows a display example when a 15R probability variation big hit occurs and the notification pattern is Pt1. For example, when the big hit fluctuation ends, as shown in FIG. 42A, a fanfare effect is executed, and a prize ball notification 410 is started to display “2250 GET”. When Round 1 is started, the status display 412 starts from “2250” as shown in FIG. Then, the status display 412 is updated every time a game ball is won at the big winning opening. When nine winnings are generated, the status display 412 is “2115” as shown in FIG. To be changed. Thereafter, when two game balls are won during the opening of the grand prize opening as round 1, the status display 412 is changed to “2100” based on the winning of the first game ball, and the second one Round 1 ends with the status display 412 unchanged based on the winning of the game balls. In this case, as shown in FIG. 42D, Round 2 is started with the status display 412 displayed as “2100”.

  Further, in this embodiment, during the big hit game, in addition to the winning ball notification, when the gaming ball passes through the normal winning gate 33 of the winning combination 50 and the gaming ball enters the variable pitching device 43, The normal winning acquisition display may be displayed. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a normal winning acquisition display. As shown in FIG. 43, during the big hit game, when the game ball passes through the normal winning gate 33 and the game ball enters the variable winning device 43, a normal winning acquisition display 500 is displayed on the image display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 43, “+3” is displayed as the normal winning acquisition display, and a display for notifying that three winning balls are obtained in addition to the winning balls obtained by winning the big winning opening is performed. .

  In this embodiment, a case where a normal winning acquisition display such as “+3” is displayed based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the normal winning gate 33 and the gaming ball has entered the variable pitching device 43 is shown. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a predetermined winning sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R each time a game ball enters the variable ball entering device 43. Further, for example, a predetermined meter display may be performed on the image display device 5 and a display in which the scale of the meter gradually increases according to the game ball entering the variable ball entry device 43 may be performed.

  Further, for example, each time a game ball passes through the normal winning gate 33 and a game ball enters the variable pitching device 43, the cumulative number of prize balls may be displayed. Further, for example, the number of game balls that have passed through the normal winning gate 33 and entered the variable pitching device 43 may be counted and displayed.

  Further, for example, based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the variable pitching device 43, the numerical value shown in the status display 412 of the prize ball notification 410 may be updated to a numerical value obtained by subtracting 3 and displayed. .

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the predetermined area through which the game medium can pass, the special area different from the predetermined area through which the game medium can pass, and the entry after the game medium passes through the special area. With possible special entry. In addition, the predetermined area starts to be variablely displayed when the game medium passes and is given a game medium. Further, in the special area, the variable display is not started even when the game medium passes, but the game medium is given when the game medium passes. And the special discharge area | region for discharging | emitting the game media which passed the special area | region but did not approach a special approach part is provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress misunderstanding that the player has lost money. Specifically, it can be prevented from being confused with a game ball discharged from the normal first out port 41, and misunderstanding that the player has lost money can be suppressed.

  In addition, “game media passes” means, for example, that a game ball wins like the first start winning port or the second start winning port, and a game ball passes like the normal winning gate 33. It is a concept that includes both. Further, “game media enters” is a concept that indicates that a game ball enters but a prize ball is not paid out, such as the variable pitching device 43.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the normal discharge area different from the special discharge area is provided. The special discharge area is arranged near the special entry portion as compared with the normal discharge area. Therefore, by shortening the period until the game balls that have not entered the variable entry device 43 are discharged, it is difficult to recognize that the game balls are discharged without entering the ball. You can make it look like you are not.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the special approach portion is formed as a variable approach device that can be changed to a state in which a game medium can enter when controlled to a predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest when being controlled to a predetermined state.

  In particular, in this embodiment, since the variable pitching device 43 is controlled to be open during the big hit gaming state as the predetermined state, in addition to the prize balls obtained by winning the special variable winning ball device 7, Even when the ball device 43 is entered, it can be seen that a winning ball is obtained, and it is possible to further enhance the sense of excitement that the winning ball is obtained during the big hit game.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the variable winning means that can change between the first state in which the game medium can be won and the second state in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to win is provided, and controlled to the advantageous state. Sometimes the variable winning means is changed to the first state. Further, the special entry portion is changed to a state in which the game medium can enter, and the special entry portion is changed to a state in which the game medium can enter in the same cycle as the cycle in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the period in which the special entry unit changes to a state in which the game medium can enter.

  Further, according to this embodiment, after changing the variable winning means to the first state, the variable winning means can be controlled to the second state based on at least a predetermined number of game media winning in the variable winning means. is there. On the other hand, after changing the special entry portion into a state where game media can enter, control is performed to change the special entry portion into a state where game media cannot enter even if a predetermined number of game media enter the special entry portion. Absent. For this reason, there is no limit to the number of game media that can enter the special approach section, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, the variable pitching device 43 is a component controlled by the effect control microcomputer 200 and can be said to function as a kind of effect for the effect. Therefore, a plurality of variable ball entry devices that can enter game balls similar to or similar to the variable ball entry device 43 may be arranged on the surface of the game board 2.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of playing a game and can be changed between a first state in which a game medium can be won and a second state in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to win. Executes a predetermined number of unit games that can change the variable winning means to the first state until at least one of the variable winning means and a predetermined period of time has passed or a predetermined number of game media have been won An advantageous state control means that can be controlled to an advantageous state, a value giving means that gives a predetermined value when a game medium wins the variable winning means, and a notification that performs notification corresponding to the value that can be given in the advantageous state And a state display unit capable of executing a state display that changes when a game medium is won in the variable winning unit toward a specific state corresponding to the notification. The state display unit is a single unit in the advantageous state. If the game medium has a certain number winning more than the predetermined number in a game, it was decided to limit the change in the status display. Thus, in order to limit the change when a predetermined number of game media are awarded to the variable winning means, the value of the value notified as being grantable and the value notified as being actually given It is possible to prevent contradiction from occurring in size.

  In the present embodiment, since the value of the planned number of winning balls is displayed as “status display”, the “specific state” is displayed as “0”. When the display is made as “status display”, the “specific status” is displayed as “2250” or “1200”. When a meter whose gauge is decreasing is displayed as “status display”, the status where the gauge of the meter shows the minimum value is “specific status”, and the meter whose gauge is increasing is displayed as “status display”. In this case, the state where the gauge of the meter shows the maximum value is the “specific state”.

  In the present embodiment, the notification means performs specific notification when the assignable value is maximum. Thereby, since the player can recognize that the maximum value is given, the interest can be improved.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, it was supposed that the special effect execution means which performs a special effect when a state display changes to a specific state was provided. Thereby, an uplifting feeling can be given to a player and an interest can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the notification means can execute a plurality of types of notifications with different notification contents at different timings. Thereby, interest can be improved.

  Note that the notification timing is not limited to during the fanfare period. For example, a predetermined timing after the start of the round in the big hit gaming state may be used as the notification timing. In addition, notification may be performed at a predetermined timing, or notification may be performed at a timing when the state display becomes a predetermined mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in one unit game, there is provided a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on the fact that a predetermined number of game media have been won in the variable winning means, and the specific effect executing means May limit the execution of a specific effect when a predetermined number of winnings and a winning after a predetermined number of winnings are continued within a specific period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, after the state display was changed into the specific state, it was decided that the special notification corresponding to the value which can be further provided can be performed. Thereby, even if it is a case where it changes to a specific state, expectation can be maintained.

  By the way, in such a pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, one that can execute a predetermined notice effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the identification information at the start of variable display of the identification information is known. There is a problem that the movement of the identification information becomes difficult to understand due to a predetermined notice effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display mode.

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 that prevents the movement of identification information from becoming difficult to understand and improves the interest of the game will be described.

  In the second embodiment, for the purpose of preventing the explanation from becoming complicated, attention is paid to the configuration for preventing the movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand and improving the fun of the game. This is an example. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with a configuration for suppressing misunderstanding that a player has been damaged as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 44 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. FIG. 45 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the description of each step in the flowchart according to the present embodiment, for example, a portion described as “Step S1” may be abbreviated as “S1”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, and a plurality of types that can be distinguished from each other in a special game as an example of a variable display game. The special symbol which is the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game. In a decorative symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display portions, for example, three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified are variably displayed. Different types of symbol numbers, such as any one of “1” to “9”, need only be attached to a plurality of types of ornament symbols variably displayed in each ornament symbol display area. Such variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, Variations of the decorative symbols are started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. Note that the variable display of various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols is synchronized, for example, the start and end of variable display are performed at the same timing, and the period of variable display is approximately the same. . The effect image indicating the decorative design is also referred to as an identification information image. Therefore, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of the effect image indicating the decorative symbol serving as the identification information image is performed. Is performed, and an effect image indicating the confirmed decorative pattern that is the display result is derived.

  For example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols is to stop and display identification information such as decorative symbols and to end variable display. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be stopped and displayed, and for example, a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction may occur. Such a decorative symbol display state is also called a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, and although the display result in the variable decorative symbol display is not definitely displayed, the variation of the decorative symbol due to scroll display or update display proceeds. The player can recognize that it is not. Note that the temporary stop display of the decorative design may include displaying the decorative design completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display unit 5HL and a second hold display unit 5HR are arranged. The 1st reservation display part 5HL displays the 1st special figure reservation memory number so that identification is possible. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of variable display hold corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The 2nd reservation display part 5HR displays the 2nd special figure reservation memory number so that identification is possible. The second special figure holding memory number is the variable display holding number corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display suspension corresponding to the special figure game is due to the game ball passing through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Occurs based on the starting prize. That is, the start condition for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative design is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not yet satisfied due to being controlled to the big hit gaming state or the like, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended.

  For example, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize that the game ball passes through the first start prize opening, the first If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not established, the first special figure holding memory number is incremented by one, and the first special figure is used. The execution of the special figure game was suspended. In addition, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established by the occurrence of the second start prize that the game ball passes through the second start prize opening, 2 If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second special condition is not established, the second special figure holding memory number is incremented by 1, and the second special figure is used. The execution of the special figure game was suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. 1 is subtracted from the number stored in the second special figure hold. If the first special figure holding storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit when the first start winning is generated, the first start condition is not satisfied, and the special figure game based on the start winning is invalid. The prize ball may be paid out only. Further, if the second special figure holding storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit when the second starting prize is generated, the second starting condition is not satisfied, and the special figure game based on the starting prize is invalid. The prize ball may be paid out only.

  In the first hold display section 5HL, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is performed. In the second hold display section 5HR, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure is performed. The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. The term “special figure pending storage number” simply refers to a concept that includes all of the first special figure pending memory number, the second special figure pending memory number, and the total pending memory number, and particularly refers to a part thereof. It may happen.

  The first hold display section 5HL only needs to be configured so that the first hold display is performed, for example, right-justified. The first hold display portion 5HL is provided with four display parts corresponding to “4” which is the upper limit value of the first special figure hold memory number, and hold numbers “1”, “2”, “3” in order from the right end. ”And“ 4 ”. When the number of holds of the special figure game using the first special figure increases due to the establishment of the first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display part 5HL, the hold on the first hold display part 5HL At the rightmost display portion corresponding to the number “1”, a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold memory number. If there is another first hold display in the first hold display portion 5HL, a new first hold display is hidden on the left side of the display part where the other first hold display is performed. Add to the site. When there is a plurality of first hold displays in the first hold display section 5HL, and when a special figure game using the first special figure is started due to establishment of a new first start condition, the first hold display section 5HL The first hold display in the rightmost display portion corresponding to the hold number “1” is deleted, and the first hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” is deleted. Move in the direction of the part. As described above, the first hold display unit 5HL is configured to perform hold display corresponding to the special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A that has not yet been started.

  The second hold display unit 5HR may be configured so that the second hold display is performed, for example, left-justified. The second hold display section 5HR is provided with four display parts corresponding to “4” which is the upper limit value of the second special figure hold memory number, and hold numbers “1”, “2”, “3” in order from the left end. ”And“ 4 ”. When the number of holdings of the special figure game using the second special figure increases due to the establishment of the second start condition, if there is no other second holding display in the second holding display part 5HR, the holding in the second holding display part 5HR At the leftmost display portion corresponding to the number “1”, a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented second special figure hold memory number. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display portion 5HR, a new second hold display is hidden on the right side of the display part where the other second hold display is performed. Add to the site. When there is a plurality of second hold indications in the second hold display portion 5HR, when a special game using the second special drawing is started due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second hold display portion 5HR A display in which the second hold display in the leftmost display portion corresponding to the hold number “1” is deleted and each of the second hold displays in the display portions corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” is deleted. Move in the direction of the part. In this way, the second hold display unit 5HR is configured to perform hold display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B that has not yet started.

  A display device for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the first hold display section 5HL and the second hold display section 5HR, or instead of the first hold display section 5HL and the second hold display section 5HR. . In the example shown in FIG. 44, the number of special figure reservation memories can be specified on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the first hold display portion 5HL and the second hold display portion 5HR. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B for displaying are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, a number of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit values of the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number, respectively. .

  In the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a small symbol display area 5V which is smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of “left”, “middle” and “right”. In the small symbol display area 5V, the small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable symbols and special symbols. The effect image indicating the small symbol is also referred to as a notification information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 5V provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of the effect image indicating the small symbol serving as the notification information image is performed, and the effect image indicating the confirmed small symbol serving as the display result is displayed. Derived.

  In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small symbols different from the decorative symbols is performed. During the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols until the finalized decorative symbol that is the display result is derived, the variable display of small symbols continues to be performed in a certain display mode and disappears from the screen or is blocked. It is not shielded by. Therefore, the small symbol display area 5V is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 5V. The small symbols variably displayed in the small symbol display area 5V are always referred to as small symbols or effect small symbols. In the small symbol display area 5V, for example, a plurality of types of decorative symbols, each of which is a part of or all of a plurality of types of decorative symbols, such as a symbol indicating a number in the same manner as a portion indicating a number in a decorative symbol. The effect image showing the small symbols may be variably displayed as the notification information image. The small symbol may be displayed only when the decorative symbol is not displayed. The variable display of the small symbols may be difficult or impossible to visually recognize during the execution period of the full-screen notice effect described later.

  In addition, a 4th symbol is provided after the special symbol, the decorative symbol, and further the normal symbol, and the variable display of the 4th symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. The variable display of the 4th symbol is, for example, a display that repeats display and non-display at a certain time interval with a specific display color in the 4th symbol display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5 or outside the screen. Realized by continuing control. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbol may be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

  Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided at positions separated from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as the right side of the game area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It has been. Therefore, the player who is paying attention to the effect by the display on the image display device 5 has difficulty in confirming the display state on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable symbol display proceeds. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not a display result has been derived. In contrast, by performing variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 5V provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, whether or not variable display is in progress, Whether or not the display result has been derived can be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. And forming a second start winning opening.

  As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not pass through the second starting winning opening. To. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, so that the game ball can pass through the second starting winning hole. Put it in a state. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second start winning opening, while the expanded opening state when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. However, it may be configured so that the game ball is difficult to enter. As described above, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has the first variable state such as the open state or the enlarged open state where the game ball can pass through the second start winning port, the closed state where the game ball cannot pass, or the passage difficult. It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a normally open state.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. If a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, and the first reserved memory number is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value, the first start condition is To establish. If a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, and the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, the second start condition is To establish.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening shown in FIG. 45, and a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the off state, the special prize opening door closes the special winning opening and the game ball cannot pass through the special prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, and the game ball easily passes through the big prize opening. Become. As described above, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball is easy to pass and advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass and is disadvantageous for the player. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes through the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 23, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes through the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, for example, when the gaming ball passes through another winning opening such as the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out. Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain the winning ball by passing the game ball through the special prize winning opening, which is disadvantageous for the player. There are two states.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed so that it can be changed. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game. Above the normal symbol display 20, there is provided a general figure reservation display 25C for displaying the number of general reservations stored as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the gate switch 21 of FIG.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number of gaming balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that a gaming ball that has entered one of the general winning holes is detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting operation handle is provided that is operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. A dish is provided. A lower tray is provided at the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3 so as to hold the surplus balls overflowing from the upper tray so that they can be discharged out of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body. The stick controller 31A includes an operation rod that is held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod. The trigger button may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation can be performed by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operation finger in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operating hand. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation on the trigger button or the like may be built in the operation rod.

  A controller sensor unit 35 </ b> A including a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilt operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower pan body or the like below the stick controller 31 </ b> A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is configured to include four transmissive photosensors in combination with two transmissive photosensors arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side. Just do it.

  The member that forms the upper plate is provided with a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35B that detects the player's operation act on the push button 31B only needs to be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 shown in FIG. 45 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back surface of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer are provided. The main board 11 controls turning on and off of each of the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B and controls variable display of the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Also, a function for controlling the variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the normal symbol variable display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting, extinction, and coloring of the normal symbol display 20. I have.

  On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize door.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are mounted. In other words, the effect control board 12 performs a display operation in the image display device 5, an operation for turning on or off all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, and the like. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical parts for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as all or a part, is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9, decoration LEDs, etc. A lamp driver circuit for supplying a drive current for turning on and off the light is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch, and a count switch 23. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball as a game medium like what is called a sensor, for example. Further, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the like.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. The effect control command also includes an abnormal winning notification command for instructing abnormality notification. When the abnormality notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, an error notification process is executed under the control of the effect control board 12, as will be described later. Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE, and the second byte indicates EXT. It is sufficient that the first bit of the MODE data is always set to “1” and the first bit of the EXT data is set to “0” in advance.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 101 that stores a game control program and fixed data, and a RAM 102 that provides a game control work area. The CPU 103 is configured to execute a game control program to perform a control operation, the random number circuit 104 to update numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103, and the I / O 105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 only needs to incorporate the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register different from the RAM 102. The random value may be updated by updating the stored value regularly or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored. In the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored so as to be rewritable.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. 5, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in FIG. 5, a random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device as an effect electrical component included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on various information transmitted as effect control commands from the main board 11.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring or the like for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, a random counter for effects provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, and the like, the numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the effect operation are countably updated. . The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 12, it is possible to count numerical data indicating random values for determining various effects such as a random number for determining a stop symbol in a variable display of decorative symbols, and a random value for determining a notice effect. Controlled.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 45 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination tables, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern includes, for example, process data including effect control execution data and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

  In the effect control execution data included in the effect control pattern, the display control data indicates the display mode of various images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. More specifically, the display control data includes the types, positions, and sizes of effect images indicating backgrounds, various symbols such as decorative symbols and small symbols, characters, and the like that constitute each frame displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, data for designating the display order when a plurality of effect images are superimposed and displayed, and the like. The data indicating the display order of the effect images may be data indicating which effect image among the plurality of effect images is arranged on the front side as viewed from the player.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on a display control command or the like from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 performs control for executing decorative display variable display and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. As an example, VDP, CGROM, VRAM, LCD drive circuit, and the like may be mounted on the display control unit 123. The VDP may be a GPU, a GCL, or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a DSP. The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configured image data memory may be used.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is comprised including. For example, an output port of the I / O 125 outputs a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command transmitted to the audio control board 13, a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14, and the like.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a launch motor provided in a predetermined hit ball launching device based on a predetermined operation performed by a player on a hit ball operating handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Thus, a game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes through the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the first start is performed because the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The condition is met. After that, for example, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. Is done.

  Further, when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the second start condition is satisfied because the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. To do. Thereafter, a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended. Is done. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 of FIG. 45, the normal symbol starting condition for executing the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 20 is established. Thereafter, the normal symbol game 20 is started by the normal symbol display 20 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display such as the end of the previous normal symbol game has been completed. In the normal game, after a predetermined time has elapsed after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, if a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  When a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, or when a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, a special game is started. Whether or not to make the symbol variable display result a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, decorative display different from the special symbols is variably displayed. The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are also referred to as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, respectively. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a fixed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable display result is “big jackpot”, and the bonus game state is controlled as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, whether or not the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As a special symbol variable display result, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed, and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is “lost”.

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is “big hit”, a predetermined big hit is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A finalized decorative symbol to be combined is derived and displayed. As an example, if the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the combination of big hits is confirmed. It is only necessary that the decorative design is derived and displayed.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, in the period until the predetermined opening upper limit time elapses, or the period until a predetermined number of game balls enter the grand prize opening and a winning ball is generated, the grand prize opening is continuously opened. Round game is executed. During a period other than the execution period of such a round game, the big winning opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big prize opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit is reached.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” may be included. When the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit time in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state advantageous to the player is relatively long as a round game in the jackpot game state. A regular round of time is performed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “surprise”, a short-term open round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state is relatively short is executed as a round game in the jackpot game state. Is done. The big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as a first specific gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is also referred to as a second specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state when the big hit type is “surprise”, the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in the short-term open round is longer than the first period in the normal open round. Becomes a short second period. It should be noted that the same control as when the normal opening round is executed may be performed except that the opening period of the big prize opening is controlled to be the second period in the short-term opening round. Alternatively, when the short-term open round is executed, the number of executions of the round game may be a second round number that is smaller than the first round number that is the number of executions of the normal open round. That is, the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is a period in which the game ball is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes through the big winning opening in each round game, compared to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed. May be at least one of the second period being shorter than the first period and the second round number being less than the first round number.

  When such a short-term open round is executed, a predetermined number of balls can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening. However, due to the opening period of the big winning opening being the second period, etc., it becomes a big hit gaming state in which the actual payout cannot be obtained. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the jackpot type is “surprise” is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot gaming state based on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”. Become. Thus, when the jackpot gaming state in which the normal open round is executed based on the fact that the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the game ball is likely to pass through the big winning opening. In the change mode, control is performed to change the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 between the first state and the second state. On the other hand, when the jackpot gaming state in which a short-term opening round is executed based on the fact that the jackpot type is “accurate”, a special change is made in the second change mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the big winning opening. Control to change the variable winning ball apparatus 7 between the first state and the second state is performed.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, based on the fact that a predetermined probability change control condition is satisfied, the probability display may be controlled to a probability change state where the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” is higher than the normal state. The probability change state is continued until a predetermined probability change end condition is satisfied, for example, a predetermined number of variable displays are executed, or a big hit gaming state is started before the number of executions of the variable display reaches the predetermined number of times. To be controlled. The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next big hit gaming state is started regardless of the number of executions of variable display. After the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to the short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. The short-time state continues until a predetermined short-time end condition is satisfied, for example, that a predetermined number of variable displays are executed, or that a big hit gaming state is started before the number of executions of the variable display reaches the predetermined number of times. To be controlled. As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state becomes a short-time state. On the other hand, after the big hit gaming state is ended when the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise probability”, the gaming state becomes the probability change state.

  In the probability changing state and the short time state, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is changed between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes through the second start winning opening compared to the normal state. For example, the normal symbol display 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal game to have a shorter variation time than in the normal state, and the probability that the variable symbol display result of each normal game is “per normal” in each normal game. The tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure” is higher than that in the normal state. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode by the control for increasing the length of time and the control for increasing the number of tilts compared to the normal state. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control. By controlling to such a probable change state and a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a “big hit” is shortened, and a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is obtained. Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

  In the image display device 5, a decorative pattern other than the final stop symbol is stopped, rocked, enlarged / reduced or deformed in a state in which it matches the jackpot combination continuously for a predetermined time, or a plurality of ornaments An effect that is performed in a state in which the possibility of a big hit is continued before the final result is displayed because the symbols are synchronously fluctuating with the same symbol or the display position is switched is called a reach effect. As a reach effect, decoration such as displaying a character image different from the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, changing the display mode of the background image, and reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative design. An effect operation different from changing the pattern variation mode may be executed. Not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the like are different from the operation modes before the reach mode. May be included in the reach production. The reach state and its state are referred to as the reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is not a big hit combination, it becomes “lost” and the variability display state ends.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns having different operation modes may be prepared in advance. And the possibility of being a “big hit” varies depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, a normal reach production and a super reach production are preset. When the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is higher than in the case where the reach effect in the normal reach is executed. In addition, the reach production that becomes the super reach may include a plurality of types of reach production including a super reach that executes a specific reach production in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is higher than other super reach.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach effect, the variable display status of decorative designs may be in the reach state, the variable display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. There may be a case where a variable display effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of decorative symbols. As an example, it is only necessary that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect can be executed during decorative display of the decorative design. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, in response to the start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once, a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed after variable display of the decorative pattern is started. It is possible to perform the effect display that is changed once again after the temporary stop until the predetermined time. The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. What is necessary is just the number of times that the decorative symbol is re-variable in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, as an example, a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chances of special combinations are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A decorative symbol that is one of the various types of lose combinations is displayed temporarily. A predetermined effect such as an image display as a re-variation effect may be executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Note that the re-variation effect is not limited to that by displaying an image on the screen of the image display device 5, and may include any effect operation using various effect devices.

  As an example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, during the period of each variable display by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, it is lit among a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area. It may be controlled so that things increase one by one. In addition, during the period of each variable display, the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs may be controlled to change. .

  As a further example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, control is performed so that the effect model provided inside or outside the game area operates during each variable display period by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. May be. At this time, during each variable display period, the operation mode of the production model may be controlled to change, or the operation model among the plurality of production models may be controlled to change. .

  Control may be performed so that a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 during the period of each variable display by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. Further, as a re-variation effect, for example, when a decorative symbol that becomes a pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily stopped and displayed, a sound that becomes a special sound effect may be controlled to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or instead of some or all of these re-variation effects, lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of effect models, display of effect images, sound effects It may be controlled to execute a re-variation effect combining a part or all of the outputs. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect forms is included, or a case where a re-change effect is performed multiple times, compared to a case where a re-change effect is executed with only one type of effect form. When the production mode changes in the game, the possibility that a predetermined game value such as the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” may be increased.

  In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the decoration pattern is based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change once to three times. It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display is started 2-4 times in succession. When the number of repeated executions of the pseudo continuous variation increases, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” becomes higher than when the number of pseudo continuous changes is small. Further, the production ratio may be controlled so as to change depending on the number of times the pseudo-continuous variation is repeatedly executed. For example, “reach determination” may be performed when the pseudo continuous variation is performed twice, and “super reach determination” may be performed when the pseudo continuous variation is performed three times. Note that the number of times of pseudo-continuous variation in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed up to more than 1 to 3, for example, 4 times or 5 times.

  In addition to “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using such variable display operation of decorative symbols include, for example, “slip”, “expansion chance eyes”, “end development opportunity eyes”, “slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “sliding”, “variable” of “left”, “middle”, “right” from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol to the display of the definite decorative symbol that is the variable display result is displayed. After changing the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in a single or a plurality of decorative symbol display areas and then temporarily displaying the decorative symbols. An effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed by changing the decorative symbol after changing the decorative symbol again in a predetermined number of decorative symbol display areas in the area.

  In the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, the decoration of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern that results in the variable display. In all of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is set as the reach state. Reach production begins. On the other hand, in the variable display effect of “end of development opportunity”, after the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed for deriving and displaying a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as a development opportunity. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. , “Left”, “Medium”, “Right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed in a decorative combination display area that temporarily becomes a false combination chance decorative symbol display area. Unlike the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect that changes the decorative symbols again in all of 5L, 5C, and 5R, by changing the decorative symbols again in some of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is performed.

  During variable display of decorative designs, unlike variable display effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-continuous”, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, or a message image or voice output is displayed. There is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the symbol variable display operation, that a reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is `` A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility of being a “hit”.

  The effect operation as the notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As long as it is executed before the reach mode is reached. In addition, the notice effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “hit” may include one that is executed after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols until the fixed special symbols and fixed decorative symbols that result in variable display are derived. Anything that can give notice of sex is acceptable. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation when such a notice effect is executed.

  The notice effect includes a pre-read notice effect. The pre-reading notice effect may cause the variable display result to be a “big hit” depending on the presentation mode before the variable display for which the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is executed. It is a notice effect that can be noticed. In particular, a pre-reading notice effect that continuously gives notice over a variable display of decorative symbols executed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of special drawing games is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. In the pre-reading notice effect, before the variable display to be noticed is started, for example, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” based on the reserved memory of the special figure game due to the occurrence of the start winning, etc. The production operation is started. In contrast to the pre-reading notice effect, the notice effect that is executed after the variable display to be noticed is started is referred to as a single notice effect.

  In this embodiment, as an example of the pre-reading notice effect, the display part of the first hold display in the first hold display part 5HL and the display part of the second hold display in the second hold display part 5HR are displayed as normal display modes. By changing to a different display mode, a pre-reading notice effect of “pending display change” for notifying the possibility of “big hit” in the variable display to be noticed is executed. More specifically, the variable display result may be a “big hit” by setting the display color in the display part for displaying the number of special figure reservations to be specified in a specific color different from the predetermined color in the normal state. It is only necessary to be able to report that is higher than usual. In addition, by making the display pattern in the first hold display and the second hold display a specific pattern different from the normal time, it is possible to notify that the possibility that the variable display result is “big hit” is higher than normal. Also good. Alternatively, a display mode that indicates a predetermined message as the first hold display or the second hold display may be used to notify that the possibility that the display color is changed to a specific color is higher than usual. Such a hold display that suggests that the display mode is likely to change to a specific mode is also referred to as a suggestion hold display. The pre-reading notice effect of “hold display change” is also called a hold display change effect.

  The pre-reading notice effect that is executed based on the occurrence of the start prize is executed before the player can determine whether or not the notice content by the pre-reading notice effect is realized after the start prize has occurred. I just need it. For example, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state due to the occurrence of a certain start prize is executed at least before the variable display state of the decorative symbols based on the occurrence of the start prize becomes the reach state. If it is. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect that predicts that the variable display result may be a “hit” due to the occurrence of a certain start prize is at least as much as the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed in the variable display based on the occurrence of the start prize. Anything executed before is sufficient.

  When the hold display change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display may or may not change. An effect in which the display mode of the hold display changes among the hold display change effects is also called a hold display change success effect. An effect in which the display mode of the hold display does not change among the hold display change effects is also referred to as a hold display change failure effect. In addition, the hold display change common effect includes the hold display change common effect. When the hold display change effect is executed, first, the hold display change common effect that is executed in common when the display mode of the hold display is changed and when it is not changed is executed. The hold display change common effect includes, for example, an effect effect in which an effect image indicating a character prepared in advance is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 and has an effect on the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified. Just go out.

  The effect image showing the character CH1 in the reserved display change common effect is an example of the specific effect image. An accelerated display image P shown in FIG. 75C, which will be described later, is also an example of the specific effect image. The effect image showing the character CH1 may be continuously displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 over a plurality of variable displays based on the setting corresponding to the determination result of executing the hold display change effect. The effect image indicating the character CH1 serving as the specific effect image only needs to be disposed at an overlapping position on the front side as viewed from the player rather than at least a part of the effect image indicating the decorative pattern serving as the identification information image. In this case, in the period in which the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 serving as the specific effect image is displayed at a position overlapping in front of the effect image indicating the decorative symbol. Let it be a stationary mode.

  The action effect in the hold display change common effect acts on either the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HL or the second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HR, so that the display mode of the hold display is changed. Any display effect that suggests the possibility of a change may be used. Along with such a display effect, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a part or all of the light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are lit in a predetermined lighting mode, The movable member may be operated in a predetermined operation mode.

  When the hold display change success effect is executed after the hold display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display exerted by the action effect is changed. Thus, after the action effect in the hold display change common effect is executed, the effect in which the display mode of the hold display that exerts the action changes is also called the hold change effect as the first success effect. On the other hand, when the hold display change failure effect is executed after the hold display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display exerted by the action effect is not changed. As described above, the effect in which the action display in the hold display change common effect is executed but the display mode of the hold display in which the effect is exerted does not change is also referred to as a hold change change effect as the first failure effect.

  The effect of changing the display color of the hold display is also referred to as a display color change effect. The effect of changing the display mode of the hold display to the display mode indicating a predetermined message is also referred to as a special display change effect.

  When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is “lost”, the variable display mode is “non-reach”, and the variable display mode is variable. The case where the display mode is “reach” is included. When the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display state of the decorative pattern is not reached, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and the combination of the predetermined decorative pattern that does not become reach is stopped. Is displayed. When the variable display mode is “reach”, the reach display is executed after the variable display state of the decorative design becomes the reach state after the variable display state of the decorative design is started. A combination of predetermined decorative designs that are not to be displayed is stopped. The non-reach combination and the decorative symbol constituting the reach combination may be included in the non-specific display result together with the special symbol that becomes the lost symbol.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial setting after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. In addition, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, gaming random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in pachinko gaming machine 1 A process for controlling the progress of the process is included.

  The switch processing is processing for determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The main-side error process is a process of performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

  As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side include a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern, The random number value MR5 for determining the figure display result may be included. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit gaming state. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. It is a random value used for The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. The random value MR5 for determining the normal figure display result is higher than the closed state of the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B with the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in the normal figure game as “per normal figure”. It is a random value used for determining whether or not to control to an open state in which game balls easily pass by frequency.

  In the special symbol process included in the game control timer interrupt processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and displayed on the special symbol display device 4 Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform operation control, setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process is a process that controls the display operation of the normal symbol display 20 to enable variable display of the normal symbol, setting of the tilting operation of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the like. In the normal symbol process, as the high opening control accompanying the short-time control, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the normal state. The control for improving the probability that the variable display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the variable display result being “per normal figure”. Control for making the tilt control time for performing tilt control longer than that in the normal state and part or all of the control for increasing the number of tilts compared to in the normal state are performed.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in the command control process, the output control board 12 among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. This makes it possible to transmit an effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S101 of FIG. 46 as the start winning determination process. When the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 47 is started, the CPU 103 first, based on a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is on (S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (S201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number, which is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (S202). At this time, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. When the first special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in S202 (S202; No), the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to “1”. (S203).

  When the first start port switch 22A is OFF in S201 (S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in S202 (S202; Yes), the normally variable winning ball apparatus Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by 6B, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is ON (S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is ON (S204; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number, which is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (S205). At this time, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102. When the number of second special figure reservation storage is not the upper limit value in S205 (S205; No), the starting port buffer value is set to “2” (S206).

  After either of the processes of S203 and S206 is executed, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be incremented by 1 (S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value increases by 1 when the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is increased by 1 when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to Thus, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure hold memory number is updated to increase by 1. When the second start condition is satisfied, the second special figure hold memory number is updated to increase by one. . At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is updated to add 1 (S208).

  After executing the process of S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start prize (S209). As an example, in the processing of S209, random number MR1 for determining a special figure display result and randomness for determining a jackpot type are selected from numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. Numeric data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (S210).

  In the processing of S210, for example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data Is set in the second special figure storage unit. The first special figure storage unit stores a special figure game that has not yet started as a special game, although the game ball has passed through the first starting prize opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting prize has been generated. Remember. The second special figure holding storage unit holds a special figure game that has not yet started, although the game ball has passed through the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second starting prize has been generated. Remember as.

  For example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the order of winning in the first starting winning opening, and the CPU 103 extracts the special number extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the establishment of the first starting condition by passing the game ball. Random value MR1 for determining the display result, random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are stored as pending data until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value. . The hold data thus stored in the first special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is being held, and the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result in this special figure game To determine whether or not to control, whether the variable display result is "big hit", whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, whether the decorative display variable display mode is a specific mode, etc. It becomes the reserved storage information to be made possible. As described above, the first special figure storage unit has established the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, but has not yet started. Stored storage information of a special figure game in the first special symbol display device 4A.

  For example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding numbers in the order of winning in the second starting winning opening, and the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the establishment of the second starting condition by passing the game ball. Random value MR1 for determining the display result, random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are stored as pending data until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value. . The hold data thus stored in the second special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is being held, and the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result in this special figure game To determine whether or not the control is determined to be controlled, whether the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big hit” is any of a plurality of types, or whether the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode, etc. It becomes the reserved storage information to be made possible. As described above, the second special figure holding storage unit has established the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, but has not yet started. Stored storage information of a special figure game in the second special symbol display device 4B.

  Subsequent to the process of S210, settings for transmitting a start opening prize designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 are performed (S211). Subsequently, a winning random number determination process is executed (S212). Then, the setting for transmitting the reserved memory number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (S213). Further, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (S214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “2” (S214; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (S215), and then the start winning determination process. Exit. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “1” (S214; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (S216), and then the processing of S204 is performed. Proceed to processing. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S212 of FIG. 47 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, in a special symbol normal process to be described later, a determination as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol display result as "big hit", The variation pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these decisions, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process in S212 at the start winning timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening, thereby deriving the big hit symbol as the special figure display result. Then, it is determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is determined, whether or not the random pattern MR3 is determined to be a variation pattern in which the variable display state of the decorative design is set to the reach state, and the like. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has passed through the start winning opening is started, whether or not the special symbol display result becomes “big hit”, the decorative symbol is variable It is determined whether or not a reach state is displayed during display, and based on this prediction result, it is determined whether or not a notice effect as a pre-read effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the effect control board 12 side. can do.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 48, the CPU 103 first determines the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by, for example, confirming the state of the time reduction flag or the probability variation flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. Specify (S401). More specifically, when the probability change flag is ON, the gaming state is a probability change state, when the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is ON, the game state is a time reduction state, and both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are both What is necessary is just to specify that it is a normal state when it is OFF, respectively. Further, it is only necessary to identify whether or not the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the big hit gaming state by confirming the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  The CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state specified in this way is a big hit in which the big hit gaming state is set (S402). At this time, when it is determined that the big hit is not being made, it is further determined whether or not the high base is being operated in which the high opening control associated with the time reduction control is performed in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (S403). When it is determined in S402 that the jackpot is being hit (S402; Yes), or when it is determined that the high base is being set in S403 (S403; Yes), whether or not the start port buffer value is “2”. Is determined (S404).

  When it is determined in S403 that the vehicle is not in the high base (S403; No), or when it is determined in S404 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (S404; Yes), the results are shown in FIG. Various variable display contents are determined using the random value extracted in the process of S209. In this embodiment, the variable display contents to be determined at the time of starting winning are “big hit”, “super reach determination at the time of loss”, “reach determination at the time of loss”, and “general at the time of loss”.

  The CPU 101 sets a big hit determination range in order to determine whether or not the variable display content is “big hit”. For example, data used for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state is selected from a specific display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance. In this special figure display result determination table data, the range of the determined value assigned with the special figure display result “big hit” may be set as the big hit determination range. This jackpot determination range is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in the process of S209. At this time, if the random value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range, the variable display content is determined as “big hit”.

  Corresponding to the fact that the random display value MR1 is outside the range of the big hit determination range, and it is determined that the variable display content is not “big hit”, the super reach determination range or reach determination range at the time of losing is set. The super reach determination range and reach determination range at the time of losing is determined in advance as a range of random values that can be determined as a variation pattern with reach production including super reach or normal reach regardless of the number of special figure hold memory. It only has to be.

  When variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a random pattern MR3 for determining a variation pattern and a variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance are prepared. Of the plurality of variation patterns, the variation pattern used in the current variable display is determined. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is assigned to one of the plurality of variation patterns. The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern to which the determined value matching the random value MR3 is assigned as the variation pattern used in the current variable display. For example, in the variation pattern determination table used at the time of losing when the variable display result is “lost”, as shown in FIG. 54 (B1) and FIG. It differs depending on the number of figure hold memory and the number of second special figure hold memory. However, some of the determined values are assigned to the same variation pattern regardless of the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number. The range of decision values assigned to the variation pattern with super reach among the decision values assigned to the variation pattern with super reach in the table data constituting such a variation pattern determination table. However, what is necessary is just to be predetermined as a super reach fixed range. In addition, in the table data constituting the variation pattern determination table, among the determined values allocated to the variation pattern with the reach effect including the normal reach, it is allocated to the variation pattern with the reach effect regardless of the number of special figure holding memories. The determined value range may be determined in advance as the reach determination range.

  FIG. 49 shows an example of determination of the variation pattern at the time of losing when the variable display result is “losing”. When the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state without time-saving control, a variation pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. 54 (B1) are assigned to the variation patterns is used. In this case, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the first special figure reserved memory number. . On the other hand, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “271” to “300”, it is uncertain whether super-reach is involved or not according to the first special figure reserved memory number. It is determined that the change pattern is determined to have a reach effect including a normal reach regardless of at least the first special figure reserved memory number.

  Further, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability change state with time reduction control or a time reduction state, a change pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. 54 (B2) are assigned to the change patterns is used. It is done. In this case, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the second special figure reserved storage number. . On the other hand, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “289” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with normal reach is determined regardless of the second special figure reserved memory number. .

  The special figure hold memory number when the start winning occurs does not necessarily match the special figure hold memory number when the variable display is actually started. May change due to winnings. Therefore, the table data selected due to the difference in the number of special figure hold memory may not match between the determination result at the time of starting winning and the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the start of variable display. It is generally difficult to predict whether or not a pattern is determined. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination table in this embodiment, when the variable display result is `` lost '', at least the determination value assigned to the variation pattern with super reach or the variation pattern with reach effect including normal reach is A common decision value is included regardless of the number of special figure holds. Therefore, whether or not it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the number of special figure holding memories at the time of starting winning or variable display start in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the reach effect including the normal reach It can be determined whether or not it is determined to be determined to be a variation pattern involving.

  When the variable display result is “losing” in the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, the variable display content If the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “271” to “300”, the variable display content is “reach determination at lose”. judge. If the variable display result is “losing” during the time reduction in which the time reduction control is being performed, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, the variable display content Is determined to be “super reach determination at the time of loss”, and if the random number knowledge MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “289” to “300”, the variable display content is “reach determination at the time of loss” judge.

  When it is determined in S404 shown in FIG. 48 that the starting port buffer value is “1” instead of “2” (S404; No), a setting for restricting determination at the time of winning in the process of S405 is performed (S406). ). Thus, when the high opening control associated with the short time control is performed or when the game state is a big hit game, the determination of the variable display content based on the occurrence of the start winning due to the game ball passing through the first starting winning opening is not performed. To be limited. Thus, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the first start is performed during the high opening control or the big hit gaming state. The soundness of the game can be ensured by restricting the pre-reading notice based on winning a prize from being executed.

  After that, the notification contents at the time of start winning according to the determination result by the process of S405 and the setting by the process of S406 are set (S407). In accordance with such notification contents, a setting for transmitting a winning determination result command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (S408), and the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  FIG. 50 shows a setting example of a start opening winning designation command, a pending storage number notification command, and a winning determination result command. In this embodiment, a command B100H serving as a first start opening winning designation command and a command B200H serving as a second starting opening winning designation command are prepared in advance as start opening winning designation commands. Note that the subscript H indicates a hexadecimal number. In addition, as a reserved memory count notification command, a command C1XXH serving as a first reserved memory count notification command and a command C2XXH serving as a second reserved memory count notification command are prepared in advance. XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the pending storage count notification command, different EXT data is set according to the special figure pending storage count. Further, a command C4XXH serving as a winning determination result command is prepared in advance.

  When a game ball that has passed through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning is generated, the first special figure holding memory is stored in the process of S202 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the number has not reached the upper limit value, the first start condition is satisfied. The first start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “1” in the process of S203 shown in FIG. 47, and then the transmission setting is performed by the process of S211 to change from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, a first start opening winning designation command is transmitted. 48, the winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the processing of S408 shown in FIG. Furthermore, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the process of S213 shown in FIG. The

  When the game ball that has passed through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning is generated, the second special figure is suspended in the process of S205 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the stored number has not reached the upper limit value, the second start condition is satisfied. The second start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “2” in the process of S206 shown in FIG. 47, and then the transmission setting is performed by the process of S211 to change from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, a second start opening winning designation command is transmitted. 48, the winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the processing of S408 shown in FIG. Furthermore, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the process of S213 shown in FIG. The

  On the side of the production control board 12, it is possible to detect the establishment of the first start condition by receiving the first start opening prize designation command, and to detect the establishment of the second start condition by receiving the second start opening prize designation command. it can. Thus, the first start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the first start condition. The second start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the second start condition. The determination result command at the time of winning is at the time of the first start winning that is the time of detecting the game ball that has passed the first starting winning opening, or at the time of the second starting winning that is the time of detecting the game ball that has passed the second starting winning opening, The comparison result using the game random number extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like is notified to the effect control board 12 side. The first reserved memory count notification command notifies the first special figure reserved memory count. The second reserved memory count notification command notifies the second special figure reserved memory count. In this embodiment, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command indicate whether the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and the start winning has occurred. Is sent as hold notification information for designating which of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number has increased.

  Note that the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command correspond to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be transmitted. Alternatively, when the number of reserved memories increases, the number of reserved memories decreases while the number of reserved memories added indicates that the number of first special figure reserved memories or the number of second reserved figure reserved memories has increased. Alternatively, a reserved memory number subtraction designation command indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has decreased may be transmitted. Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, or together with the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, the total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number May be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase in the total pending storage number may be used.

  FIG. 50 (B) exemplifies the notification contents by the winning determination result command. Of the winning determination result commands shown in FIG. 50B, the command C402H, the command C403H, and the command C404H may be transmitted when the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is not within the jackpot determination range. The winning determination result is notified that the variable display result is determined to be “losing” and is not controlled to the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, the command C401H is transmitted when the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the jackpot determination range, and when the winning is determined that the variable display result is determined to be “hit” and controlled to the jackpot gaming state. Notify the judgment result. The command C402H is transmitted when the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the super reach determination range at the time of losing, and notifies the determination result at the time of winning that the variation pattern with super reach is determined at the time of losing. The command C403H is transmitted when the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the reach determination range at the time of losing, and notifies the determination result at the time of winning that the variation pattern with the reach effect is determined at the time of losing. The command C404H is transmitted when the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is not within the super reach determination range or reach determination range at the time of losing, and when winning a prize that there is a possibility that the variation pattern with reach effect may not be determined Notify the judgment result. In this way, the winning determination result command uses the game random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or whether it is determined to a specific variation pattern. Is transmitted as determination result information for notifying the determination result at the time of winning.

  The special symbol normal process of S110 shown in FIG. 46 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the first special symbol display unit 4A, the second special symbol reservation storage unit, the second special diagram reservation storage unit, etc. It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determined by the variable display result. Decide before derivation display. At this time, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is determined as one of a plurality of types. The data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, whereby the jackpot type is stored. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is set corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. . In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process of S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the deriving of the definite special symbol resulting in the variable display result is determined. The variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to “reach” by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is “lost” in the variation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Furthermore, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol variation process of S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the special symbol display device 4, a process for measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, and the like. . When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. This special symbol stop process includes a process of setting the special symbol display device 4 to stop the change of the special symbol and to stop and display the confirmed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result. When the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed, a setting for transmitting the symbol confirmation command to the effect control board 12 is performed as an effect control command capable of specifying that the display result in the variable display is derived. Then, it is determined whether or not a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is turned on. When the big hit flag is ON, the transmission setting of the hit start designation command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result being “big hit” is set, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing of S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big hit is based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”, etc., and the process for starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state and setting the open state for the big winning opening etc. It is included. When the big hit release pre-processing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release process of S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit release post-processing in S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the big winning opening is in an open state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or the next round game when the upper limit number has not been reached. The process etc. which wait until it is started are included. When the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, while when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. Is updated.

  The big hit end process of S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until the time elapses, processing that performs various settings for controlling to the probability variation state and the time-short state corresponding to the success or failure of the probability variation control condition, and the like are included. Then, when the setting for controlling to the probability change state or the time reduction state is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 46 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 51, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (S231). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 only has to read the second reserved memory number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in S231 (S231; No), a numerical value indicating a predetermined random number value as the hold data stored in the head area of the second special figure reservation storage unit Data is read out (S232). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning in the second start winning opening in the process of S209 shown in FIG. 47 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in a random number buffer for variation, for example, and temporarily stored.

  Following the processing of S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the second special figure reserved memory unit The stored contents are shifted (S233). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit is shifted up by one entry. Further, in the process of S233, the total number of reserved memories may be updated by 1. Then, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is updated to “2” (S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in S231 (S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (S235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 only has to read the first reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of S235 is executed when it is determined in S231 that the second special figure hold memory number is “0”, and whether or not the first special figure hold memory number is “0”. Determine whether. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  If the special game is executed in the order in which the game balls have passed through the start winning opening, regardless of whether it is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening And the start opening data indicating which game ball has passed through the second start winning opening is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in association with the hold number together with the hold data or separately from the hold data, What is necessary is just to make it possible to specify the order in which the start conditions are established for the special game corresponding to each hold data.

  Subsequent to the processing of S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory unit is updated. The stored content is shifted (S237). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit is shifted up by one entry. Further, in the process of S237, the total number of reserved memories may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (S238).

  After executing one of the processes of S234 and S238, the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, is determined as either “big hit” or “losing” (S239). As an example, in the process of S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the determination result as to whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “lost”. Just do it. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read from the variation random number buffer. If the special symbol display result is determined to be “big hit” in the process of S239, the special symbol display result derived in the special symbol game becomes the big hit symbol as the specific display result, and the decorative symbol variable display After the display result derived in step S1 becomes a definite decorative combination of jackpot combination, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. In this way, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player by executing the process of S239.

  In the process of S239, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state and the probability variation control is performed, the special figure is displayed at a higher rate than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the time reduction state. The result is determined as “big hit”. The probability change state is started when the probability change flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise accuracy” by the big hit end processing of S117 shown in FIG. 46, for example. The When the probability variation state is in effect, the special figure display result is likely to be a “hit” and more likely to result in a big hit gaming state than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state.

  The CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of S239 is “big hit” (S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is set to the on state (S241). Also, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types (S242). As an example, in the process of S242, a big hit type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in a use table for determining the big hit type. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the numerical value to be compared with the random number for determining the jackpot type is any of the plurality of jackpot types. It is only necessary to be assigned to the determination result of whether or not. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 read from the variation random number buffer.

  After executing the processing of S242, the big hit type is stored (S243). The CPU 103 may store the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  If the special symbol display result is not “big hit” in S240 (S240; No), or after executing the processing of S243, the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined (S244). ). As an example, if it is determined in S240 that the special symbol display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol predetermined as the lost symbol is determined as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in S240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, one of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is selected according to the determination result of the big hit type in S242. What is necessary is just to determine a fixed special symbol.

  After executing the process of S244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (S245), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in S245, and the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process of S111 shown in FIG. 46 is executed.

  In S235, when the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (S246), the special symbol normal process is performed. finish. In this demonstration display setting, for example, whether or not an effect control command for designating a demonstration display by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Determine. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in S111 of FIG. 46 as the variation pattern setting processing. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 52, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (S261). If the big hit flag is ON (S261; Yes), a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (S262). On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (S261; No), the variation pattern corresponding to the time of loss when the special figure display result is “lost” is determined (S263).

  In the process of S262, for example, a big hit variation pattern is determined using a big hit variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. In the big hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” by referring to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern reading read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. What is necessary is just to determine a fluctuation pattern. In the process of S263, for example, a variation pattern at the time of the loss is determined using a loss variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. In the loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “lost” by referring to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern random number MR3 read from the variation random number buffer. What is necessary is just to determine a fluctuation pattern.

  FIG. 53 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” that does not reach the reach state and “reach” that reaches the reach state. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of them and corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern, and a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern. . The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect in normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect in super reach is executed.

  FIG. 54 shows an example of determining a big hit variation pattern or a loss variation pattern. In the process of S262 shown in FIG. 52, for example, the variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 54A, any one of the variation pattern PA3-1 to variation pattern PA3-3 and variation pattern PB3-1 to variation pattern PB3-4 is used at a predetermined rate as the variation pattern at the time of the big hit. To be determined. In the process of S263 shown in FIG. 52, the change pattern at the time of loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. In the process of S263 shown in FIG. 52, when the time reduction control is being performed, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. 54 (B2), for example. In the process of S263, by determining the variation pattern at the time of losing, it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is to be the reach state when the variable display result is “losing”. It should be noted that whether or not to reach the reach state may be determined when the variable display result is “lost” by a process separate from the determination of the variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54 (A), the determined values assigned to the variation patterns accompanying the reach effect in the super reach, such as the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, are the variation patterns PA3-1 to variation patterns. It is set to be larger than the determined value assigned to the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the normal reach such as PA3-3. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 54 (B1) or 54 (B2), the determined values assigned to the variation patterns with the reach effect in the normal reach, such as the variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, vary. It is set to be larger than the determined values assigned to the variation patterns accompanied by the reach effect in the super reach such as the patterns PB2-1 to PB2-4. Thereby, when the variable display result is derived after the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is increased.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 54 (B1), a determination value assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the first special figure reservation storage number is 0, 1 or 2 or more. As a specific example, the determined value in the range of “151” to “180” is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-1 if the first special figure reserved memory number is 0, and the first special figure reserved memory number is 1. If it is, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-2, and if the first special figure reservation storage number is 2 or more, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-3. With such a setting, the average variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols can be varied according to the number of first special symbol reservations stored. In particular, when the first special figure reserved memory number is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, each of the first special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value so that the average variable display time can be shortened. It is sufficient that a determined value is assigned to the variation pattern. In normal times when the time reduction control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, the same table data as when the first special figure reservation memory number is a predetermined value is used regardless of the second special figure reservation memory number. With reference to this, the determination of the variation pattern may be performed. Alternatively, regardless of the second special figure holding memory number when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, refer to the table data corresponding to the first special figure holding memory number at that time. The variation pattern may be determined. Or, corresponding to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, regardless of the second special figure holding memory number, FIG. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data that is different from the determination value B1). Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the “first special figure reserved memory number” shown in FIG. 54 (B1) is read as the “second special figure reserved memory number”. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data corresponding to the second special figure reserved storage number.

  The determination example shown in FIG. 54B2 includes determination values that are assigned to different variation patterns depending on whether the second special figure reservation storage number is 0, 1 or 2 or more. With such a setting, the average variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols can be varied according to the number of second special symbol hold memories. In particular, when the second special figure reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, each of the second special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value so that the average variable display time can be shortened. It is sufficient that a determined value is assigned to the variation pattern. During the time reduction in which the time reduction control is performed, the game ball easily passes through the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is high. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeated if the time is short. The possibility of being executed is high, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. When the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is zero. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is established, the same table data as when the second special figure reservation memory number is a predetermined value is used regardless of the first special figure reservation memory number. With reference to this, the determination of the variation pattern may be performed. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data that is different from the determination value allocation shown in FIG. 54 (B2) regardless of the first special figure reserved storage number. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the “second special figure reserved memory number” shown in FIG. 54 (B2) is read as the “first special figure reserved memory number”. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data corresponding to the first special figure reserved storage number.

  After executing one of the processes of S262 and S263, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time is set (S264). The special symbol variation time that becomes the variable display time of the special symbol is a time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 53, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation time is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern in the processes of S262 and S263. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which a special symbol or decorative symbol variable display result is derived by setting the special symbol variation time.

  Following the process of S264, a start condition is selected from the special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special graphic game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special-figure games in which is established (S265). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After the process of S265 is executed, command transmission is set at the start of the special symbol fluctuation (S266). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends the first variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the first variation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the second variation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated.

  The first variation start command and the second variation start command use the variation start in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is an effect control command for designating the start of fluctuation in the special figure game. The first variation start command and the second variation start command are also simply referred to as variation start commands. The variation pattern designation command is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. This is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative design. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

  After executing the process of S266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (S267), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in S267 and the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process of S112 shown in FIG. 46 is executed.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main process shown in FIG. 55 is executed. When the production control main process is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S51), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and registers the CTC mounted on the production control board 12. Make settings. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (S52). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (S52; No), it waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (S52; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and command analysis processing is executed (S54). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  As an example, in the command analysis process, when there is a received command stored in the effect control command reception buffer, it is determined which effect control command is received by checking the MODE data of the received command. . At this time, when the winning determination result command and the first reserved memory number notification command are received together with the first starting opening winning designation command, an empty area in the first starting winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area or the like of the RAM 122 Among these, the first start opening winning designation command and the first reserved storage number notification command are stored in order in the storage area having the smallest reserved display number serving as the buffer number. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second start opening prize designation command, the reserved number which is the buffer number among the free areas in the second start prize command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like. In the storage area with the smallest display number, the second start opening winning designation command and the second reserved memory number notification command are stored in order.

  A storage area is secured in the first start winning command buffer so that a set of effect control commands transmitted in response to the occurrence of the first starting winning can be stored in association with each other. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the first start winning is generated, corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the first start winning command buffer according to the receiving order. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area. The hold display number in the first start winning command buffer corresponds to the first special figure hold memory number.

  A storage area is secured in the second start winning command buffer so that a set of effect control commands transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second starting win can be stored in association with each other. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the second start winning is generated, in accordance with the reception order, corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the second start winning command buffer. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area. The hold display number in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to the second special figure hold memory number.

  After executing the command analysis process, an effect control process is executed (S55). In the effect control process, for example, various operations such as an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and a lighting operation in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed. Following the effect control process, an effect random number update process is executed (S56), and numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter in the RAM 122 is updated by software as various random values used for effect control. To do.

  Subsequently, when an abnormality notification command included in the effect control command is received from the main board 11, an error notification process (S57) for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is executed according to the command. In the error notification process, for example, an error image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is displayed on the image display device 5 under control of the effect control CPU 120, or a sound for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or output. After execution of the error notification process, the process returns to S52.

  The error image may be displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 60 (D1) described later, or as shown in FIG. 60 (D2). 5 may be displayed in a part of the display area. Further, for example, if the abnormality notification command indicates an abnormal winning, the error image is displayed in a full screen display mode, and if the abnormality notification command indicates a dashing error, it is displayed in a partial display mode. As described above, the display mode of the error image may be changed according to the type of error.

  In this embodiment, the error image is not deleted from the image display device 5 until the error indicated by the abnormality notification command is resolved. Therefore, the error image is not erased during the derivation display of the variable display result, and the display of the error image has priority over the display of the adjustment result image R described later. In this embodiment, as described later, the volume as the effect can be adjusted by the player's operation, but the error sound cannot be adjusted with the initial setting. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player or the game store clerk from noticing the occurrence of the error even though some error has occurred.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 56, first, a change effect character display process is executed (S162). The change effect character display processing is for displaying an effect image showing the character in the hold display change common effect on the screen of the image display device 5 based on the setting according to the determination result of executing the hold display change effect. Includes processing. The change effect character display process is a process for determining whether or not a change start command or a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received, or a display of an effect image indicating a character according to these determination results. It includes processing for performing control.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect character display process executed in S162 of FIG. In the change effect character display process shown in FIG. 57, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the character is being displayed (S601). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the character is being displayed when the effect image indicating the character CH1 shown in FIG. 58B used in the hold display change common effect is displayed.

  If the character is not being displayed in S601 (S601; No), it is determined whether there is a change effect setting (S602). For example, if the CPU 120 for effect control specifies the storage contents of the hold display change pattern and the change effect timing pattern in the hold display data storage unit and information corresponding to the determination result of executing the hold display change effect is stored, It may be determined that there is a change effect setting. If there is no change effect setting (S602; No), the change effect character display process is terminated.

  When the change effect is set in S602 (S602; Yes), the effect image indicating the change effect character is controlled to start display on the screen of the image display device 5 (S603). The change effect character display process is terminated. In the process of S603, the effect control CPU 120 may change the display mode of the change effect character according to the determination result of whether or not the decorative symbol is being variably displayed. Whether or not the decorative design is being variably displayed may be specified from the value of the effect process flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. More specifically, when the value of the effect process flag is “2”, it may be determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed. On the other hand, when the value of the effect process flag is other than “2”, it may be determined that the decorative symbol is not being variably displayed. When it is determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, a display control command for instructing to change the display mode of the change effect character to the action mode is output to the VDP of the display control unit 123, for example. On the other hand, when it is determined that the decorative symbols are not being variably displayed, a display control command for instructing to change the display mode of the change effect character to the static mode is output to the VDP of the display control unit 123, for example.

  The action mode is a display position, size, rotation amount, movement direction, movement speed, movement amount of a change effect character, a part of the shape, pattern, or color of the change effect character according to an animation pattern prepared in advance. All may be a display mode of change display that changes over time. The change of the change effect character according to the animation pattern may be repeated at a predetermined cycle. In contrast to such an action mode, the static mode may be a static display mode in which the change effect character does not change over time. In contrast to the stationary mode, the action mode is also referred to as a non-static mode or a behavior mode.

  The effect image indicating the change effect character whose display is started by executing the process of S603 is an image indicating the character used in the action effect or the like in the hold display change effect. By performing the process of S603, the effect image indicating the change effect character can be displayed even before the variable display in which the hold display change effect is executed. In this case, the effect image indicating the change effect character can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 over a plurality of variable displays.

  If the character is being displayed in S601 (S601; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined display end timing (S604). The display end timing is, for example, when the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, when the execution of the reach effect in the super reach is started, or when the execution of the hold display change effect by the hold display change pattern is ended. Any timing may be used as long as a predetermined display end condition of the change effect character is satisfied. When it is the display end timing (S604; Yes), the effect image indicating the character CH1 as the change effect character is controlled to end the display on the screen of the image display device 5 (S605), and then the change is performed. The effect character display process is terminated.

  If it is not the change end timing (S604; No), it is determined whether or not a change start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (S606). In the processing of S606, it may be determined that a variation start command has been received when either the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received. If a change start command has been received (S606; Yes), after setting for starting display control during change (S607), the change effect character display process is terminated. In the process of S607, for example, when it is determined that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed in the process of S603, a display control command for instructing to change the display mode of the change effect character to the action mode is displayed. What is necessary is just to output with respect to VDP of the part 123. Thereby, the display mode of the effect image which shows the character for change effects can be made into an action mode by reception of the change start command which can specify the start of variable display.

  If no change start command is received in S606 (S606; No), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (S608). If no symbol confirmation command is received (S608; No), the change effect character display process is terminated. On the other hand, when the symbol confirmation command is received (S608; Yes), after the setting for starting the symbol confirmation display control is performed (S609), the change effect character display processing is terminated. In the process of S609, for example, in the case where it is determined in the process of S603 that it is determined that the decorative symbol is not being variably displayed, a display control command for instructing the display mode of the change effect character to be a static mode is displayed. What is necessary is just to output with respect to VDP of the part 123. Thereby, in the period when the display result in variable display is derived | led-out, the display mode of the effect image which shows the character for change effects can be made into a static mode.

  FIG. 58 shows an example of specific settings for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. 58A shows a configuration example of a Z value setting table for assigning Z values to a plurality of display layers. FIG. 58B shows an arrangement example of each display layer based on the Z value setting by the Z value setting table. In this embodiment, the plurality of layers include an error display layer, a small symbol display layer, an adjustment result image display layer, a full screen preview display layer, a change effect display layer, a decorative symbol display layer, and a symbol preview display layer. ing. An error display effect image is drawn on the error display layer. In the small symbol display layer, an effect image showing a small symbol variably displayed in the small symbol display area 5V is drawn. When the volume is adjusted, an adjustment result image R indicating the volume adjustment result is drawn on the adjustment result image display layer. In the full screen preview display layer, a full screen preview display image used for the full screen preview effect is drawn. In the change effect display layer, an effect image indicating a character or the like used in the hold display change effect is drawn. In the decorative symbol display layer, an effect image showing the decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is drawn. In the symbol notice display layer, an image of the symbol notice display used in the symbol notice effect is drawn. The image of the symbol notice display may be a notice display related to the ornament symbol. In this embodiment, for example, the image G is positioned around the ornament symbol and has a display form such as an aura of the ornament symbol. In the image data of the effect image drawn on each display layer, a Z value that is a depth value used when drawing each effect image in a superimposed manner is set. An error display layer, a small symbol display layer, an adjustment result image display layer, a full screen notice display layer, a change effect display layer, a decorative symbol display layer by setting the Z value by the Z value setting table as shown in FIG. The Z value of the effect image drawn on each of the symbol preview display layers has a different value depending on the display layer on which the effect image is drawn.

  For example, the VDP of the display control unit 123 may determine the priority by performing a Z value comparison operation when writing image data read from the CGROM into a frame buffer or the like of the VRAM. Then, the image data of the effect image having a small Z value is written in the frame buffer in preference to the image data of the effect image having a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with a small value as the Z value has a higher priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with a large value as the Z value. Can be placed on the side.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (B), the error image display layer sets the Z value so as to be arranged at the foremost side so that the priority of the error image is higher than that of the other effect images. Yes. Further, the Z value is set so that the small symbol display layer is arranged on the front side next to the error display layer as viewed from the player. Therefore, even when a display effect is displayed by displaying an arbitrary effect image on the screen of the image display measure 5, the small symbol variable display in the small symbol display area 5V is always performed unless it overlaps the error image. The player can see it. In addition, the Z value is set so that the adjustment result image display layer is arranged on the front side next to the small symbol display layer. Thereby, the adjustment result image R indicating the adjustment result of the sound volume can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side from the image of the full screen notice display, the effect image indicating the decorative design, or the like. Also, the Z value is set so that the full-screen preview display layer is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display layer. Thereby, the full-screen preview image used in the full-screen preview effect can be arranged at an overlapping position in front of the effect image showing the decorative design, and the decorative design can be hidden. Note that the Z value may be set so that the full-screen preview display layer is arranged in front of the adjustment result image display layer. The change effect display layer is on the rear side of the small symbol display layer, but the Z value is set so as to be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display layer. Thereby, the effect image used by the hold display change effect can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative design. In this way, the effect image indicating the change effect character can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative design that is the identification information image. Also, the Z value is set so that the symbol preview display layer is arranged next to the decorative symbol display layer. Thereby, the symbol preview image used in the symbol preview effect can be arranged at an overlapping position on the rear side of the effect image showing the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol can be displayed from behind.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect setting process executed in S163 of FIG. In this embodiment, by performing the effect effect setting process described below, the volume as the effect can be adjusted by the player's adjustment operation during the game or during the customer waiting demonstration display. When the volume is adjusted, the adjustment result image R indicating the volume adjustment result is displayed in a manner in which the effect image and the demo image are superimposed on a predetermined area of the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 60A1, 60A2, 60C2, and the like, the adjustment result image R is displayed, for example, in a bar graph display mode that increases or decreases in the left-right direction. Note that the mode of the adjustment result image R is arbitrary as long as the player or the like can recognize the current volume, and may be a mode that displays a numerical value or a character corresponding to the volume, a pie chart mode, or the like.

  In this embodiment, in the menu mode, the volume can be adjusted only when the “volume adjustment” item is selected from the menu screen and the volume adjustment mode is selected. While the volume adjustment mode is selected, the adjustment result image R is always displayed. In addition, as will be described later, in response to receiving a predetermined operation during the customer waiting demonstration display, the mode shifts from the customer waiting demonstration display to the menu mode.

  When the effect effect setting process shown in FIG. 59 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the menu mode is being executed (S701). For example, the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the menu mode is being executed if the menu mode execution flag is on, and determines that the menu mode is not being executed if the flag is off. Note that the menu mode execution flag is set to an on state in S662 described later, and is cleared to an off state in S661.

  When the menu mode is not being executed (S701; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the adjustment result image display flag is on (S702). The adjustment result image display flag is set to an on state in S708 and S715, which will be described later, and cleared to an off state in S704 and S712.

  When the adjustment result image display flag is on (S702; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period T1 that has been determined in advance has elapsed since the adjustment operation was received (S703). Here, the adjustment operation is an operation performed by the player using an operation means such as a stick controller 31A, and in this embodiment, is an operation for adjusting the volume as a production effect. For example, the player tilts the stick controller 31A to the left and right to adjust the volume from within a predetermined range, and the volume at the time when the tilt operation is stopped is determined as the volume as the adjustment result.

  Note that the sound volume determination operation may be performed by pushing and pulling the trigger button of the stick controller 31A or pushing the push button 31B separately from the adjustment operation. Further, the operation means for adjusting the sound volume is not limited to the stick controller 31A, and may be a cross button or a dial-type operation means (not shown). Further, instead of the operation means, a non-contact type sensor may be used to adjust the effect by adjusting the player's adjustment operation detected by the sensor.

  The predetermined period T1 is set in advance as a display period of the adjustment result image R indicating the adjustment result of the volume. The predetermined period T1 is arbitrary as long as it is an appropriate period for the player to confirm the adjustment result, and is set to about several seconds in this embodiment. Whether or not the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the adjustment operation was accepted corresponds to, for example, a predetermined timer corresponding to the predetermined period T1 when it is determined that there is an adjustment operation (S706; Yes) in S706 described later. Just set a value and determine if the timer has timed out.

  The adjustment operation may be an operation for adjusting the display brightness of the image display device 5 or the effect effect lamp as an effect. Then, the adjustment result image R may indicate a luminance adjustment result. Moreover, what is necessary is just to adjust at least one of a volume and a brightness | luminance according to adjustment operation. Further, the predetermined period during which the adjustment result image corresponding to the volume is displayed and the predetermined period during which the adjustment result image according to the luminance is displayed may be set to the same length or set to different lengths. May be.

  In S703, when the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the adjustment operation was accepted (S703; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 deletes the adjustment result image R from the image display device 5, and turns off the adjustment result image display flag. The state is cleared (S704). With the process of S704, the adjustment result image R is erased when a predetermined period T1 has elapsed from the adjustment operation during a game or a demonstration display. Subsequent to the processing of S704, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of S706. Also, if the determination at S702 or S703 is No, the process at S706 is executed.

  In S701, when the menu mode is being executed (S701; Yes), if the volume adjustment mode is being selected (S705; Yes), the processing of S706 is executed. For example, the production control CPU 120 determines that the volume adjustment mode is selected if the volume adjustment mode selection flag is on, and determines that the volume adjustment mode is not selected if the flag is off. The volume adjustment mode selection flag is set to an on state in S664 described later, and cleared to an off state in a predetermined case. For example, when a mode selection other than volume adjustment is made during execution of the menu mode, or when the menu mode execution flag is turned off, the volume adjustment mode selection flag is cleared to the off state. When the volume adjustment mode is selected (S705; Yes), the adjustment result image R is always displayed without performing the process of S704. Even in the demonstration display, the adjustment result image R may not be erased even after the predetermined period T1 has elapsed. Even if the menu mode is being executed (S701; Yes), if the volume adjustment mode is not being selected (S705; No), the effect setting process is terminated.

  In S706, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an adjustment operation has been performed. For example, when the operation signal from the stick controller 31A is input, the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is an adjustment operation (S706; Yes), and sets the volume setting value corresponding to the adjustment operation in the RAM 122. Store in the value storage area (S707). Even in the process of S707, the volume setting value for the error sound stored in the setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 is not changed and remains the initial setting value.

  Subsequently, the CPU 120 for effect control causes the image display device 5 to display the adjustment result image R that notifies the volume setting value according to the adjustment operation, and sets the adjustment result image display flag to the on state (S708). When the adjustment result image R is already being displayed, the adjustment result image R for notifying the volume setting value according to the current adjustment operation is displayed on the image display device 5 and the adjustment result image display flag is turned on. Keep it.

  After the execution of the process of S708 or when it is determined that there is no adjustment operation in the process of S706 (S706; No), the process of S710 is executed.

  In S710, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the variable display result derivation display period T2. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is set to the on state when starting the process of completely stopping and displaying the final decorative symbol as the final stop symbol which is the variable symbol display result in the variable display effect processing described later. It is determined whether or not it is the derivation display period T2 based on the flag that is cleared to the OFF state when the process is finished. The derived display period T2 corresponds to the display period of the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, and is set to about several seconds. Therefore, in this embodiment, the derived display period T2 is shorter than the predetermined period T1 described above. Note that the derived display period T2 does not have to be constant, and may be set so that, for example, the time-short state is shorter than the normal state.

  When it is the derivation display period T2 for the variable display result (S710; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the adjustment result image display flag is on (S711), and if it is on (S711; Yes), the adjustment result image R is deleted, and the adjustment result image display flag is cleared to an off state (S712). As a result, even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed since the adjustment operation, the adjustment result image R is erased in the derived display period T2.

  On the other hand, when it is not the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result (S710; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the adjustment result image display flag is on (S713). If it is off, that is, if the adjustment result image R is not displayed (S713; No), the process of S714 is executed.

  In the processing of S714, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display derivation display period T2 has elapsed and is within the predetermined period T1. When the derivation display period T2 has elapsed and is within the predetermined period T1 (S714; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 returns and displays the adjustment result image R, and sets the adjustment result image display flag to the on state. (S715). Thereby, even if the adjustment result image R has been deleted in the process of S712, not the derived display period T2 (S710; No), but the derived display period T2 has elapsed but is within the predetermined period T1 (S714; Yes) ), The adjustment result image R is restored and displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (B).

  When the determination is YES in S713, the determination is NO in S705, S711, and S714, or after execution of S712 and S715, the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect effect setting process.

  If the adjustment result image R is erased during the derivation display period T2, the adjustment operation is invalidated or the volume setting corresponding to the adjustment operation is invalidated without going through the processing of S706 or S707. May be. Further, the volume setting value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122 may be returned to the default at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be, for example, after a specific change, after a change is executed a specific number of times, a customer waiting demo display return timing, or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted. In addition, a plurality of types having different lengths are prepared for the predetermined period T1, and may be used for each gaming state, for example. For example, the predetermined period may be 10 seconds in the short time state, and the predetermined period may be 5 seconds in the normal state.

  Here, a main example of the case where the adjustment result image R is erased during the derived display period T2 will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 61 (A) and (B). As shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, the predetermined period T1 is the display period of the adjustment result image R from the time when the most recent adjustment operation is performed, but at least a part of the predetermined period T1 and the derived display period T2 Is overlapped, the adjustment result image R is deleted. The example shown in FIG. 61A is a case where the derived display period T2 overlaps the rear end of the predetermined period T1, and in this case, the adjustment result image R is not displayed until the next adjustment operation is performed. On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 61B is a case where the derivation display period T2 is within the predetermined period T1, and in this case, when the derivation display period T2 ends, the adjustment result image R is displayed again, and the predetermined period The display continues until T1 elapses. Although not shown, when the derived display period T2 overlaps the front end of the predetermined period T1, the adjustment result image R is displayed after the end of the derived display period T2. Thus, according to this embodiment, since the adjustment result image R is erased in the derived display period T2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result that is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 60A1 is a display example of the adjustment result image R during the game. During the game, the adjustment result image R is displayed at the lower right corner of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, the display area of the adjustment result image R overlaps with a part of the decorative symbol display area Ar as shown in FIG. 60 (A1). FIG. 60A2 is a display example of the adjustment result image R during the full screen notice, and the adjustment result image R is displayed on the full screen notice display. Note that the adjustment result image R may not be displayed during the full screen notice. If the adjustment result image R is displayed during such an effect period, the interest of the full-screen notice effect may be reduced. Therefore, the adjustment result image R is not displayed during the full-screen notice, but may be adjustable. Or adjustment may be impossible.

  FIG. 60B is a display example of the adjustment result image R during the demonstration display. During the demonstration display, as shown in the figure, for example, an image indicating that a customer waiting demonstration such as “Demo Displaying” is in progress is displayed on the image display device 5 and an adjustment operation is performed. The adjustment result image R is superimposed on the demonstration display image.

  FIG. 60C1 is a display example of the menu screen during the menu mode. In this embodiment, in the menu mode, there is a volume adjustment mode selection operation by the player, and the volume adjustment is possible only when the screen is switched to the volume adjustment mode selection screen shown in FIG. 60 (C2). It has become. Selection of an item in the menu mode can be performed, for example, by tilting the stick controller 31A, and the trigger button of the stick controller 31A is pushed or pushed with the “volume adjustment” item selected, or the push button 31B is pressed. By pressing the button, the screen changes to a screen in which the volume adjustment mode is selected as shown in FIG. The operation means for selecting an item is not limited to the stick controller 31A, and may be a cross button or the like (not shown). Note that the display form of the adjustment result image R may be different between the game shown in FIGS. 60A1 and 60A2 and the volume adjustment mode selected in FIG. 60C2. For example, when the volume adjustment mode is selected, the adjustment result image R may be displayed larger than in the game, or may be displayed in the center of the image display device 5.

  60 (D1) and (D2) are examples of error images that can be displayed in the error notification process (S57) as described above. In this embodiment, the error image includes (i) the variable display result. It is not erased during the derivation display, and (ii) is displayed with priority over the adjustment result image R.

  After executing the effect setting process in S163 shown in FIG. 56, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, one of the following processes of S170 to S175 is selected. And execute.

  The variable display start waiting process in S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process starts variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 based on whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command from the main board 11 is received. The process etc. which determine whether or not are included. When the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process of S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform the variable display of decorative symbols and other various effects, the process includes the process of determining the final decorative pattern and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, etc. . When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern in accordance with the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and variably displays decorative symbols. The process for performing various production control in the inside is included. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, in response to the reception of the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11, the finalized symbol as the final stop symbol that becomes the variable symbol display result is completely stopped and displayed. Processing to be included. It should be noted that, in response to the end code being read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the confirmed decorative design may be displayed in a completely stopped manner. In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, it is autonomous on the side of the production control board 12 without using the production control command from the main board 11. The fixed display pattern can be derived and displayed on the screen to determine the variable display result. After performing such effect control, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process when the attacker is released. On the other hand, when the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is initialized. The value is updated to “0”.

  The effect process when the attacker is released in S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this attacker opening effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the screen of the image display device 5. Or by outputting a sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command to the sound control board 13, and turning on, turning off, or blinking the game effect lamp 9 or the decoration LED by outputting a command to the lamp control board 14 Various production operations are controlled during a predetermined period in which the big prize door as an attacker is opened. In the attacker opening effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process of S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the screen of the image display device 5. , Outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands to the sound control board 13, turning on, turning off, and blinking the game effect lamps 9 and decoration LEDs by outputting commands to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls at the end of the big hit gaming state are executed.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S170 of FIG. 56 as variable display start waiting processing. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command reception flag is in an ON state (S651). If the variation pattern designation command reception flag is on (S651; Yes), the variation pattern designation command reception flag is cleared to an off state (S652). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to a value “1” corresponding to the variable display start setting process (S171) (S653).

  If the variation pattern designation command reception flag is not on (S651; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a customer waiting demonstration is being displayed (S654). Whether or not the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed may be determined based on, for example, a customer waiting demonstration displaying flag that is set to an on state in accordance with the execution of S658 described later.

  If the customer waiting demonstration is not being displayed (S654; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag is on (S655). When the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag is ON (S655; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the elapsed time after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command has passed 30 seconds. (S656). Whether or not the elapsed time after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command has passed 30 seconds is set, for example, by setting the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag to the ON state in the command analysis processing shown in FIG. Then, a value corresponding to 30 seconds may be set in a predetermined timer, and it may be determined whether or not the timer has timed out.

  If 30 seconds have elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command (S656; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 turns off the customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag (S657) and the image display device 5 A predetermined customer waiting demonstration display is started (S658). The customer waiting demonstration display is not limited to a mode of displaying a character string such as “Demo Displaying” as shown in FIG. 60 (B), and may be arbitrary, for example, displaying a predetermined initial appearance, May be displayed, or a game machine manufacturer's logotype may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the case where the customer waiting demonstration display is started at the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the customer waiting demonstration display may be started at the timing when 20 seconds or one minute has elapsed after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Further, for example, the customer waiting demonstration display may be started immediately upon reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command.

  Following the process of S658, or when the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed (S654; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there has been a menu switching operation (S659). The menu switching operation is, for example, a push-down operation of the push button 31B that can be accepted during the customer waiting demonstration display. Judge that there was. The operation means that can accept the menu switching operation is arbitrary, and is not limited to the push button 31B.

  When there is a menu switching operation, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the menu mode execution flag is on (S660). If the menu mode execution flag is off (S660; No), the customer waiting demonstration display is deleted and the menu display is started, and the menu mode execution flag is set to the on state (S662). On the other hand, if the menu mode execution flag is on (S660; Yes), the menu display is deleted, the customer waiting demonstration display is restored, and the menu mode execution flag is cleared to the off state (S661).

  Subsequent to the processing of S662, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a volume adjustment mode selection operation has been performed (S663). Whether or not the volume adjustment mode selection operation has been performed may be determined, for example, by determining whether or not an operation signal is input from an operation unit that receives the operation. When there is a volume adjustment mode selection operation (S663; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the volume adjustment mode selection flag to the on state (S664). After execution of S653, S661, and S664, or in the case of No determination in S655, S656, S659, and S663, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S171 of FIG. 56 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 63, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like to be a finalized symbol as a variable symbol display result (S321). As the processing of S321, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. The final stop symbol is determined. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include “non-reach (loss)”, “reach (loss)”, “non-probability change (big hit)”, and “probability change (big hit)”. is there.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the variable display state of the decorative design is not changed to the reach state, the fixed decorative design of the non-reach combination is stopped and the variable display result is “lost”. " When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the reach lose combination is stopped and the variable display result becomes “losing”. . When the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the short-time state. When the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big win”, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is changed to the probable state.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the effect control CPU 120 determines different decorative symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left determined symbol that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, etc., and stores a left determined symbol determination table prepared and stored in the ROM 121 in advance. By referencing or the like, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, numerical value data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. For example, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable to determine the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. Thus, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined.

  When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the same decorative symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating random values for determining the left and right determined symbols that are updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and stores the left and right determined symbol determination table that is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are displayed. decide. Further, numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the middle decorative pattern becomes the same as the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol and the right fixed decorative symbol, if the final decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, any value May be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not a jackpot combination but a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative symbol, the difference between the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol and the right fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set.

  When the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The same decorative design is determined as the final stop design. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the jackpot determined symbols updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5, A decorative symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R is determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probable change (big hit)”, whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, etc. It suffices to determine which one is to be a confirmed decorative design. In the jackpot promotion effect, a combination of decorative symbols that reminds the user of the big hit but does not recall the probable change state is once stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, and then the probable state is changed during the big hit game state or at the end of the big hit game state. This is an effect to notify whether or not

  As a specific example, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, a symbol to be a definite decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when the variable display content is “probability change (big hit)” and it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative design is determined from a plurality of types of probability change designs. On the other hand, when the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Accordingly, it is only necessary to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed despite the fact that the probability variation symbols are all derived and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols, so that the player is not distrusted.

  In this way, by determining the final stop symbol corresponding to the variable display content by the process of S321, whether or not to control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the determined special symbol determination result in the special figure game The variable display result of the decorative design related to the determination result can be determined. Further, in the process of S321, a small symbol corresponding to the confirmed decorative symbol may be determined as a display result in the variable symbol variable display.

  In the process of S321, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probable change (big hit)”, it is determined whether or not to execute a probable change promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a jackpot promotion effect. May be. In the redrawing effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable big hit combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult to recognize or impossible to recognize that it is controlled to the probabilistic state, It is possible to notify that the control is changed to the probability change state by variably displaying the decoration symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probability variation big hit combination composed of the same probability variation symbol. In addition, there is a case where the control of the probability variation state is not notified by stopping the display of the decorative symbol of the non-probable big hit combination after changing the decorative symbol again in the re-lottery effect. If it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed in the process of S321, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

  Following the determination of the final stop symbol or the like in the process of S321, a change effect setting process for performing execution setting of the hold display change effect is executed (S322). In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit or the like. In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. You may do it.

  Subsequent to the process of S322, the effect control CPU 120 executes a full-screen notice effect setting process for setting a full-screen notice effect as a predetermined notice effect (S322A). In the full screen notice effect setting processing, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (B2), it is difficult to visually recognize the display pattern of the decorative design by displaying a cover image such as a dark image DG over the entire display screen of the image display device 5 at the start of fluctuation. The execution setting of the notice effect that covers the entire screen such as the blackout effect is performed. Note that the cover image is not limited to the dark image DG or the black image, and may be an image of a predetermined color or pattern, such as a light emission image or a freeze image, and the decorative pattern display form is visually recognized. Any image that becomes difficult or invisible can be used. The predetermined notice effect may be a panel type step-up notice, a cut-in notice, a story notice, a mini game notice, a development notice, etc., and is a notice effect displayed on the whole or part of the display screen. Also, it may be a notice effect that makes it impossible to visually recognize that at least the decorative design is not visible, or a notice effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize such that the display screen or the decorative design can be seen through. Further, the process of S322A may be “notice effect setting process”, and other notice effects other than the full screen notice effect, that is, other notice effects during variable display may be determined simultaneously.

  Following the process of S322A, a symbol notice effect setting process is executed (S322B). In the symbol notice effect setting process, for example, as shown in FIGS. 70B1 and 70D2, execution setting of a notice effect in which an aura image G of a predetermined color is displayed around a decorative symbol is performed. Note that the symbol notice effect is not limited to the aura display, but may be any notice related to or incidental to the decorative symbol, and as a notice for changing the display mode of the decorative symbol itself to a display mode different from the normal decorative symbol. Also good. For example, in the case of a character notice, a plurality of character notices having different character costumes, sizes, poses, types, and the like may be provided, or a plurality of background notices having different background display forms may be provided.

  Following the process of S322B, a symbol reverse start display setting process is executed (S322C). In the symbol reverse direction start display setting process, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (B1), a symbol reverse direction start display in which a decorative symbol starts in a specific direction different from a predetermined direction on the display screen of the image display device 5 at the start of fluctuation. Execution settings are performed. In this embodiment, the predetermined direction in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is the downward direction, but may be an upward direction, a left direction, a right direction, an oblique direction, a forward direction, a backward direction, and the like. Examples of the predetermined direction include a basic change direction, a direction in which the identification information is mainly displaced in variable display, a change direction when there is no notice effect, a change direction most viewed by the player, A normal direction such as a fluctuating direction is included. Moreover, although it is set as the reverse direction as a specific direction, it is good also as a direction different from a forward direction other than an upward direction. In FIG. 63, the full screen notice effect setting process (S322A), the symbol notice effect setting process (S322B), and the symbol reverse start display setting process (S322C) are executed in this order, but in an order other than this order. There may be.

  Subsequent to the process of S322C, a symbol notice effect timing adjustment process is executed (S322D). In the symbol notice effect timing adjustment process, when there is no full screen notice effect, the symbol notice effect timing is set at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 69B, adjustment is performed such that the symbol notice effect timing is changed after the full screen notice execution period.

  Following the process of S322D, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (S323). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns corresponding to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command and sets it as a use pattern. In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control selects any one of a plurality of effect control patterns prepared in response to the execution setting of the hold display change effect by the change effect setting process of S322, and sets it as a use pattern.

  Following the processing of S323, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is set in correspondence with the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command (S324). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (S325). At this time, the display area of the image display device 5 is transmitted by, for example, transmitting a display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined in the process of S323 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  Also, in the process of S325, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative symbol is started in the small symbol display area 5V while starting the variation of the decorative symbol. Thus, in the small symbol display area 5V, when the decorative symbol variable display is started in synchronization with each of the special symbol game using the first special symbol and the special symbol game using the second special symbol. The variable display of symbols can also be started. In the small symbol display area 5V, a small symbol whose variable display is started in synchronization with the special symbol game using the first special symbol and a variable symbol which is variable in synchronization with the special symbol game using the second special symbol are displayed. The starting small figure may be arranged separately. As an example, the first small symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is arranged on the right side in the small symbol display area 5V, and corresponds to the special symbol game using the second special symbol. The second small symbol variably displayed may be arranged on the left side in the small symbol display area 5V. Thus, by confirming which one of the first small symbol and the second small symbol is variably displayed, which of the special game using the first special graphic and the special graphic game using the second special graphic is executed. It is only necessary that a player or the like can identify whether the game is being played. When the first small symbol and the second small symbol are separately arranged, for example, based on a change start command or the like transmitted from the main board 11, a special game using the first special graphic and the second special graphic are used. What is necessary is just to determine in which special display game variable display is started among the special figure games using. When the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the variable display of the first small symbol is started, while when the special figure game using the second special figure is started, the second special figure game is started. What is necessary is just to start the variable display of a small symbol. As described above, in the small symbol display area 5V, the effect image indicating the first small symbol that becomes the first notification information image is variably displayed in synchronization with the special symbol game using the first special symbol, and the display result is derived. The display result may be derived by performing variable display of the effect image indicating the second small symbol that becomes the second notification information image in synchronization with the special game using the second special figure.

  After the process of S325 is executed, the first hold display of the first hold display section 5HL, the second hold display of the second hold display section 5HR, etc. are updated in response to the start of variable display of decorative symbols. To make the setting (S326). For example, when a special game using the first special figure is executed, the display part corresponding to the hold number “1” is deleted in the first hold display part 5HL, and another hold number “2” is deleted. The first hold display in the display part corresponding to “4” is moved to the right one by one. On the other hand, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed, the display part corresponding to the hold number “1” is deleted in the second hold display portion 5HR, and another hold number “2” is displayed. ”To“ 4 ”, the second hold display in the display region corresponding to“ 4 ”is moved to the left one by one. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S327), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S322A of FIG. 63 as the full-screen notice effect setting process. In the full-screen notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 64, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is a super reach change pattern or a non-reach change pattern based on the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command from the main board 11. Determine (S501). If it is determined that the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern (S501; Yes), the presence / absence of a full-screen notice effect is determined (S502).

  Specifically, in the process of S502, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the full screen notice, and uses the extracted numerical data and the full screen notice determination table shown in FIG. To determine whether to execute the full screen notice effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 64B, in the case of a non-reach variation pattern, “no execution” is determined with a probability of 90% and “execution” is determined with a probability of 10%. Is determined with a probability of 60% for “no execution” and 40% for “execution”. In the case of a super reach variation pattern, “no execution” is 30% and “execution” is 70%. Determined by probability. In the case of a big hit, the full-screen notice effect is easier to be executed than in the case of a loss, so that the full-screen notice effect can be expected to be a big hit, and the fun of the game is improved. Note that the super reach variation pattern may include a variation pattern having pseudo-continuous variation as shown in FIG. For example, the determination ratio may be such that the higher the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the higher the degree of expectation. What is necessary is just to set so that a determination ratio may differ according to whether it is a big hit and the frequency | count of a pseudo | simulation variation.

  After execution of the process of S502, it is determined whether or not a full screen notice effect has been determined (S503). If it is determined that there is a full screen notice effect (S503; Yes), the full screen notice flag is set to the on state (S504). After executing the process of S504, the forward change start timing of the decorative symbol is changed to the second timing after the end of the full screen notice effect (S505). For example, as shown in FIGS. 69 (B) and 71 (B), when there is a symbol reverse start display at the start of the change, the start timing of the forward change is not the timing T01 but the end of the full screen notice effect. The timing is changed to later timing T03. Also, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), when there is no symbol reverse start display at the start of the change, the start timing of the forward change is changed to the timing T03 after the end of the full screen notice effect.

  If it is determined in S501 that the pattern is neither a super-reach variation pattern nor a non-reach variation pattern (S501; No), if there is no full-screen notice effect in S503, or after the processing in S505, The screen preview effect setting process ends.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S322B of FIG. 63 as the symbol notice effect setting processing. In the symbol notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 65, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the pattern is a super reach change pattern or a non-reach change pattern based on the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command from the main board 11. (S511). If it is determined that the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern (S511; Yes), the presence / absence of a symbol notice effect is determined (S512).

  Specifically, in the processing of S512, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the symbol advance notice, and uses the extracted numerical data and the symbol advance notice determining table shown in FIG. 65 (B). Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the symbol notice effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 65B, in the case of a non-reach fluctuation pattern, “no execution” is determined with a probability of 90% and “execution” is determined with a probability of 10%. Is determined with a probability of 60% for “no execution” and 40% for “execution”. In the case of a super reach variation pattern, “no execution” is 30% and “execution” is 70%. Determined by probability. In the case of a big hit, the symbol notice effect is easier to be executed than in the case of losing, and it is possible to have a big hit expectation for the symbol notice effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. Note that the super reach variation pattern may include a variation pattern having pseudo-continuous variation as shown in FIG. For example, the determination ratio may be such that the higher the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the higher the degree of expectation. What is necessary is just to set so that a determination ratio may differ according to whether it is a big hit and the frequency | count of a pseudo | simulation variation.

  After execution of the process of S512, it is determined whether or not there is a symbol notice effect (S513). If it is determined that there is a symbol notice effect (S513; Yes), the symbol notice flag is set to the on state (S514). After executing the process of S514, the type of symbol notice is determined (S515).

  Specifically, in the process of S515, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number for determining the symbol advance notice effect type, and also includes the extracted numerical data and the symbol advance notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. Are used to determine the type of symbol notice effect, that is, the color of the aura of the decorative symbol. For example, as shown in FIG. 65C, in the case of the non-reach variation pattern, “blue” is determined, and in the case of the super reach (loss) variation pattern, “blue” is 50% and “green” is 40%. % And “red” are determined with a probability of 10%, and in the case of a super reach variation pattern, “blue” is determined with a probability of 10%, “green” is determined with a probability of 30%, and “red” is determined with a probability of 60%. The The jackpot expectation level increases in the order of blue <green <red, the aura is expected to be a big hit for the type of symbol notice effect, it can have an interest in the symbol notice effect, and the entertainment of the game Will improve. Note that “red” in the case of the super reach (loss) variation pattern shown in FIG. 65C may be set to 0%. In this case, the “red” of the aura can be used as a premium symbol advance notice that the jackpot is confirmed.

  If it is determined in S511 that the pattern is neither a super reach variation pattern nor a non-reach variation pattern (S511; No), if there is no symbol announcement effect in S513, or after execution of the processing of S515, The effect setting process ends.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in S322C of FIG. 63 as the symbol reverse start display setting processing. In the symbol reverse start display setting process shown in FIG. 66, whether the effect control CPU 120 is a super reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command from the main board 11. Is determined (S521). If it is determined that the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern (S521; Yes), the presence / absence of a symbol reverse start display is determined (S522).

  Specifically, in the process of S522, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for design reverse start display determination, and at the same time, extracts the numerical data and the design reverse start display determination shown in FIG. 66 (B). Whether or not to execute the symbol reverse start display is determined using the table. For example, as shown in FIG. 66B, in the case of a non-reach fluctuation pattern, “no execution” is determined with a probability of 90% and “execution” is determined with a probability of 10%. Is determined with a probability of 60% for “no execution” and 40% for “execution”. In the case of a super reach variation pattern, “no execution” is 30% and “execution” is 70%. Determined by probability. In the case of a big hit, the symbol reverse start display is easier to be executed than in the case of a loss, and the symbol reverse direction start display can be expected to have a big hit, improving the fun of the game.

  After execution of the process of S522, it is determined whether or not there is a symbol reverse start display (S523). If it is determined that there is a symbol reverse start display (S523; Yes), symbol reverse start display control setting is performed (S524). For example, as shown in FIGS. 69 (A) and 69 (B), display control setting is performed to execute the reverse direction variation of the decorative symbol during the reverse variation period. On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol reverse start display is not present (S523; No), it is determined whether or not the full-screen notice flag is on (S525).

  If the all-screen notice flag is ON (S525; Yes), it is set to the symbol swing during the all symbols notice effect period (S526). As shown in FIG. 73 (B), display setting for swinging in the horizontal direction is performed while the decorative symbols remain at the reference position Ref during the entire symbol notice effect period. Such a swing of the decorative design is hidden from the player because it is hidden by the blackout effects shown in FIGS. 74 (B2) and (B3). When the period of the full screen notice effect is shorter than the period before the start of the forward fluctuation, the swing of the decorative pattern can be visually recognized in the period from the timing T11 to T12 and the period from the timing T13 to T14. On the other hand, if the full-screen notice flag is not on (S525; No), as shown in FIG. 73A, the forward change start timing of the decorative symbol is set to the timing T01 at the start of change (S527).

  If it is determined in S521 that the pattern is neither a super-reach variation pattern nor a non-reach variation pattern (S521; No), or after executing the processing of S524, S526, and S527, the design reverse start display setting processing is terminated. .

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S322D of FIG. 63 as the symbol notice effect timing adjustment processing. In the symbol notice effect timing adjustment process shown in FIG. 67, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the symbol notice flag is on (S531). If the symbol notice flag is on (S531; Yes), it is determined whether or not the full screen notice flag is on (S532). If the full screen notice flag is on (S532; Yes), the symbol notice effect is set after the end of the full screen notice effect period (S533). On the other hand, if the full screen notice flag is off (S532; No), the symbol notice effect is set at the start of the fluctuation (S534). When the symbol notice flag is off in S531 (S531; No), or after the processing of S533 and S534, the symbol notice effect timing adjustment process is terminated.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S172 of FIG. 56 as the variable display effect process. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 68, first, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like, for example, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has passed (S341). As an example, in the process of S341, when the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated and the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, the variable display time is changed. What is necessary is just to determine with having passed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in S341 (S341; No), it is determined whether or not it is the hold display change effect period for executing the hold display change effect (S342). The hold display change effect period may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern determined in the process of S323 shown in FIG. 63, for example. If it is the hold display change effect period (S342; Yes), control for executing the hold display change effect is performed (S343). In the process of S343, various commands created based on the setting of the display change effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on, blinked, or turned off. Alternatively, it is only necessary to execute the hold display change effect in a predetermined effect device by combining some or all of them.

  Note that the effect image showing the character in the hold display change common effect among the hold display change effects is displayed by executing the process of S603 shown in FIG. 57, and the processes of S607 and S609 are executed. Thus, display control is performed during variable display or at the time of symbol determination, and the display ends when the processing of S605 is executed. Therefore, in the process of S343, display control related to the change effect character may not be performed. Alternatively, in the variable display in which the action effect in the hold display change effect is executed, the display of the change effect character is controlled in the process of S343, and in the variable display in which the action effect is not executed, the change effect character in the process of S343. The display control may not be performed.

  When it is determined in S342 that it is not the hold display change effect period (S342; No), after executing the process of S343, whether or not it is the full screen notice effect period for executing the full screen notice effect. Is determined (S344). When it is the full screen notice effect period (S344; Yes), control for executing the full screen notice effect is performed (S344A).

  When it is determined in S344 that it is not the full-screen notice effect period (S344; No), after executing the process of S344A, it is determined whether or not it is the symbol notice effect period for executing the symbol notice effect. (S344B). If it is the symbol notice effect period (S344B; Yes), control for executing the symbol notice effect is performed (S345).

  When it is determined in S344B that it is not the symbol notice effect period (S344B; No), it is a symbol reverse start display period for executing the symbol reverse start display after executing the process of S345. Is determined (S345A). When it is the symbol reverse start display period (S345A; Yes), control for executing the symbol reverse start display is performed (S345B). Also, other notice effects during variable display may be executed immediately after S345, immediately after S345B, or the like.

  When it is determined in S345A that it is not the symbol reverse start period (S345A; No), after executing the process of S345B, it is determined whether or not it is a reach effect period for executing the reach effect ( S346). The reach production period may be determined in advance, for example, in the production control pattern determined according to the variation pattern. When it is determined in S346 that it is the reach production period (S346; Yes), control for executing the reach production is performed (S347).

  When it is determined in S346 that it is not the reach effect period (S346; No), after executing the process of S347, the effect control CPU 120, for example, sets in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern Based on the above, control for executing effects during variable display including variable display operation of decorative symbols is performed (S348).

  If the variable display time has elapsed in S341 (S341; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (S349). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (S349; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and the apparatus waits. If the predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to successfully receive the symbol confirmation command. You may make it do.

  When the symbol confirmation command is received in S349 (S349; Yes), for example, the display result in the variable symbol display such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. A control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol is performed (S350). Further, in the process of S350, the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed, and the small symbol variation end control for ending the variation of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5V is performed. In the small symbol variation end control, as a display result in the small symbol variable display, the small symbol corresponding to the confirmed decorative symbol determined in the process of S321 shown in FIG. 63 is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 5V. That's fine. As a result, in the small symbol display area 5V, the confirmed decorative symbol that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with each of the special symbol game using the first special symbol and the special symbol game using the second symbol. When the variable display is terminated after being derived, the variable display of the small symbols can also be ended. At this time, a predetermined time is set as the waiting start designation command reception waiting time (S351). In the process of S351A, the full-screen notice flag and the symbol notice flag are reset to the off state (S351A). Also, after the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (S352), the effect process during variable display is ended.

  For example, in the process of S348 shown in FIG. 68, the display control in the small symbol display area 5V is performed so that the small symbols are always variably displayed in a constant variation mode regardless of the variable display state of the decorative symbols. You can do it. For example, when the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes a reach state or when a variable display effect such as “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. Even when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in part or all of 5R, the small symbols are not temporarily stopped and displayed in the small symbol display area 5V. Can be done.

  Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, after the game ball that has been driven into the game area passes through the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and a start winning such as the first starting winning and the second starting winning is generated, a special symbol is generated. And the special symbol variable display is started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B based on the establishment of the start condition permitting the start of variable display of the decorative symbols. On the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols and small symbols is performed in synchronization with variable display of special symbols.

  When the first start condition is established based on the occurrence of the first start winning due to the game ball passing through the first start winning opening, the processing of S203 and S207 shown in FIG. The figure storage number is incremented by one. When the second start condition is established based on the occurrence of the second start winning due to the game ball passing through the second start winning opening, the processing of S206 and S207 shown in FIG. The figure storage number is incremented by one. At this time, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted by the processing of S209. In S212, the winning random number determination process as shown in FIG. 48 is executed to determine the variable display contents such as whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and the winning determination result is determined. A winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  Then, it is determined whether or not an effect control command transmitted at the time of starting winning including the winning determination result command has been received. If it is determined that a command has been received, the presence / absence or type of the pending display change effect is determined based on the specified winning determination result. If it is decided to execute the hold display change effect, whether or not there is a display change is determined. When it is determined that there is a display change, a hold display change pattern is determined, and when it is determined that there is no display change, a change effect timing pattern is determined. The determination results of the hold display change pattern and the change effect timing pattern are stored in association with the hold number in the hold display data storage unit.

  In S602 shown in FIG. 57, it is determined whether or not there is a setting for executing a change effect such as a hold display change effect based on the stored contents in the hold display data storage unit. If it is determined that there is a setting, the display of the effect image indicating the character is started by the display start control in S603. The effect image indicating the change effect character can be continuously displayed over a plurality of variable displays until it is determined in S604 that the display end timing is reached. When each variable display is started, it is determined in S606 that a change start command has been received, so that the control start setting in S607 is performed, and the display mode of the effect image indicating the change effect character is the decorative pattern. It becomes an action mode corresponding to the variable display. On the other hand, when the display result in each variable display is derived, it is determined in S608 that the symbol confirmation command has been received, so that the control start setting in S609 is performed, and the effect image showing the change effect character The display mode is a static mode corresponding to the fixed display of the decorative symbol. In this way, during the period in which the display result of the effect image indicating the decorative design that is the identification information image is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character can be set to the stationary mode.

  When the special display game or the variable display of decorative symbols is started based on the establishment of the start condition, a variation pattern setting process as shown in FIG. 52 is executed in S111 shown in FIG. A variation pattern designation command that determines any one of them and indicates the determined variation pattern is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In S321 shown in FIG. 63, when the final stop symbol or the like is determined based on the variation pattern or the like indicated in the variation pattern designation command, and subsequently it is determined in the change effect setting processing in S322 that it is the hold display change timing. Is set to execute the hold display change effect. Subsequently, in the full-screen notice effect setting process of S322A, the presence / absence of the full-screen notice effect is determined, and when the full-screen notice effect is determined, execution setting for the full-screen notice effect is performed. Subsequently, in the symbol notification effect setting process of S322B, the presence / absence of the symbol notice effect is determined. When the symbol notice effect is determined to be present, execution setting of the symbol notice effect is performed. Subsequently, in the symbol reverse start display setting process of S322C, the presence / absence of the symbol reverse start display is determined, and when the symbol reverse start display is determined, execution setting of the symbol reverse start display is performed. Subsequently, in the symbol notice effect timing adjustment process of S322D, the adjustment setting of the symbol notice effect timing is performed. Then, in S172 shown in FIG. 68, the decorative symbols are variably displayed based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, and the final decorative symbol as the final stop symbol resulting in the variable symbol variable display result is completely displayed. Stop display is performed. In each effect period during the variable display, a full screen notice effect, a symbol notice effect, a symbol reverse start display, a reach effect, and the like can be executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, an example will be described in which the symbol notice effect and the reverse variation are displayed in the case of the presence or absence of the full screen notice effect. FIG. 69 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative pattern and each notice effect, and FIG. 69 (A) shows the case where the full screen notice effect is not executed, and FIG. . FIG. 70 illustrates an effect execution example in the case shown in FIG. 69 in the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 70 (A) and (B1) to (E1) are examples of performance execution in the case of FIG. 69 (A), and FIGS. 70 (A) and (B2) to (E2) are FIG. It is an example of performance execution in the case of B).

  As shown in FIG. 69 (A), with regard to the decorative symbol variation display, the backward variation of all decorative symbols is started at the start of the variation, and the forward variation of the decorative symbol is observed at the end of the backward variation. After the start, it becomes a high-speed fluctuation, and thereafter, the fluctuation of the left and right decorative symbols is decelerated to reach the reach display mode, and the reach effect is executed. Further, regarding each notice effect, etc., in FIG. 69 (A), it is determined that the full screen notice effect is not executed, and at the timing T01, the decorative symbol reverse start display and the symbol notice effect are started. . The symbol notice effect ends at timing T02, and the reverse direction change ends at timing T03. At the end of this reverse direction change, the decorative pattern starts to change in the forward direction. Looking at the execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), from the state in which the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, as shown in FIG. 70 (B1). The reverse direction variation opposite to the direction is started, and the symbol notice effect as shown in FIG. 70 (B1), that is, the notice effect in which the aura image G of a predetermined color is displayed around the decorative symbol is also started. The Then, at the end of the reverse direction variation shown in FIG. 69 (A), the reverse variation of the decorative symbol stops as shown in FIG. 70 (C1), and the decorative symbol moves forward as shown in FIG. 70 (D1). Is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a forward variation beyond the reference position Ref shown in FIG. 70 (E1).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 69 (B), since the full screen notice effect is determined to be executed, the symbol notice effect is changed from timing T01 as an initial value to timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full-screen notice effect is started as shown in FIG. 70 (B2), and “chance!” Included in the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 70 (C2). Is displayed, and after the full-screen notice effect of FIG. 70 (C2) is completed, that is, when the forward change of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 70 (D2), the sign notice effect is started. Has been changed to That is, the start of the symbol notice effect is changed after the end of the full screen notice effect shown in FIG. 70 (D2), not at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 70 (B1). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the symbol notice effect from being hidden by the full screen notice effect. In addition, although the reverse start display of the decorative symbol is executed without change, it is hidden behind the full screen notice effect shown in FIGS. 70 (B2) and (C2), and therefore cannot be seen by the player. In addition, the notification image shown in FIG. 70 (C2) is included in the full-screen notice effect, but may be a notice that is executed separately from the full-screen notice effect, or the notification image may not be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 70 (D2), the design notice effect is started before the decorative symbol reaches the reference position Ref, but the decorative symbol has returned to the reference position Ref as indicated by the one-dot chain line arrow. The symbol notice effect may be executed. Further, the execution period of the symbol notice effect is shorter than the backward change execution period as shown in FIG. 69A, but may be the same as or longer than the backward change execution period. The same applies when the start is changed to the timing T03 as shown in FIG. 69 (B).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, an example will be described in which the symbol change effect is not executed and the reverse variation is displayed in the case of the presence or absence of the full screen notice effect. FIG. 71 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative symbol and each notice effect, etc. In FIG. 71, when the symbol notice effect and the full screen notice effect are not executed in FIG. Then, there is no execution of the symbol notice effect, and the case where the reverse variation with the full screen notice effect is executed is shown. FIG. 72 shows an example of performance execution in the case shown in FIG. 71 in the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 72 (A), (B1), (C1), (D), and (E) are examples of performance execution in the case of FIG. 71 (A), FIGS. 72 (A), (B2), ( C2), (D), and (E) are examples of performance execution in the case of FIG.

  The decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 71 (A) is the same as that in FIG. 69 (A) described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. As for each notice effect, etc., in FIG. 71 (A), it is determined that the full-screen notice effect and the symbol notice effect are not executed. The direction change ends at timing T03. At the end of this reverse direction change, the decorative pattern starts to change in the forward direction. Looking at the execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), from the state in which the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, as shown in FIG. 72 (B1). The reverse direction change opposite to the direction is started, and at the end of the reverse direction change shown in FIG. 71 (A), the reverse change of the decorative design is stopped as shown in FIG. 72 (C1), and FIG. 72 (D1) As shown in FIG. 7, the decorative pattern starts to change in the forward direction, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a forward direction in excess of the reference position Ref shown in FIG. 72 (E1).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 71 (B), it is determined that the symbol notice effect is not executed, and it is determined that the full screen notice effect and the reverse direction change are executed. Starts at the start of fluctuation and ends at timing T03. At the end of this reverse direction change, the decorative pattern starts to change in the forward direction. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full-screen notice effect is started as shown in FIG. 72 (B2), and “chance!” Included in the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 72 (C2). Is displayed, and after the end of the full-screen notice effect in FIG. 72 (C2), that is, as shown in FIG. In addition, although the reverse direction start display of the decorative design is executed, since it is hidden behind the full screen notice effect shown in FIGS. 72 (B2) and (C2), the player cannot see the reverse direction fluctuation. The notification image shown in FIG. 72 (C2) is included in the full-screen notice effect, but may be a notice that is executed separately from the full-screen notice effect, or the notification image may not be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 72D, the fluctuation display in the forward direction can be visually recognized before the decorative symbol reaches the reference position Ref. However, as shown by the one-dot chain line arrow, the decorative symbol is at the reference position Ref. The change display in the forward direction from the returned state may be visible.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, an example will be described in which the reverse direction change is not executed and the symbol notice effect is executed in the presence or absence of the full screen notice effect. FIG. 73 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the variation of the decorative pattern and each notice effect, etc. In (A), there is no execution of the full screen notice effect and the reverse direction change, and in (B), the reverse direction change is not executed. The case where the full screen notice effect and the symbol notice effect are executed is shown. FIG. 74 shows an effect execution example in the case shown in FIG. 73 in the start period of the super reach variation display. Specifically, FIGS. 74 (A) and (B1) are examples of performance execution in the case of FIG. 73 (A), and FIGS. 74 (A), (B2), (C2), and (D2) are FIG. It is an example of performance execution in the case of B).

  The decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 73 (A) is the same as that in FIG. 69 (A) described above, and a description thereof is omitted here. Further, regarding each notice effect, etc., in FIG. 73A, it is determined that the full screen notice effect and the reverse variation of the decorative symbol are not executed, and the symbol notice effect is started at the start of the variation. . The symbol notice effect ends at the subsequent timing T02. In addition, the change in the forward direction of the decorative design is also started at the start of the change. Looking at the execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), from the state in which the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, as shown in FIG. 74 (B1). While the change to the direction is started, a symbol notice effect as shown in FIG. 74 (B1), that is, a notice effect in which an aura image G of a predetermined color is displayed around the decorative symbol is also started.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 73 (B), since the symbol notice effect and the full screen notice effect are determined to be executed, the symbol notice effect is changed from timing T01 as an initial value to timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full screen notice effect is started as shown in FIG. 74 (B2), and “chance!” Included in the full screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 74 (C2). Is displayed, and after the end of the full screen notice effect of FIG. 74 (C2), that is, when the forward change of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 74 (D2), the sign notice effect is started. Has been changed to That is, the start of the symbol notice effect is changed after the end of the full screen notice effect shown in FIG. 74 (D2), not at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 74 (B1). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the symbol notice effect from being hidden by the full screen notice effect. Note that, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), it is determined that the symbol notice effect and the full screen notice effect are executed, and it is determined without executing the decorative pattern reverse direction change. During the execution period of the full-screen notice effect shown in C2), the decorative symbols are swung as shown in FIG. 73 (B). Can not see the fluctuating decorative pattern. The start of the change in the forward direction of the decorative symbol is changed after the end of the execution period of all the symbol notice effects. 74 (C2) is included in the full-screen notice effect, but may be a notice that is executed separately from the full-screen notice effect, or the notice image may not be displayed.

  Here, an example of a case where the adjustment result image R is displayed during a predetermined effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 shows an effect execution example in the case of including the display of the operation promotion image P and a predetermined cut-in effect in the super reach variation pattern.

  When the decorative symbol variable display is executed and the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state as shown in FIG. 75A, a predetermined reach effect is executed in the normal reach, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75B. By displaying a simple development notification image on the image display device 5, the development notification to the super reach is performed. When the player performs an adjustment operation during the change, the adjustment result image R is displayed at the lower right corner of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  Following such development notification, the operation promotion image P is displayed during the execution of the reach effect in the super reach as shown in FIG. When the operation using the push button 31B is performed, a predetermined cut-in effect is executed as shown in FIG. 75 (D). Note that, when the operation by the push button 31B is not performed during the display period of the operation promotion image P, the cut-in effect is not executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75E, for example, the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  Until the predetermined period T1 elapses after the adjustment operation is performed, the adjustment result image R remains displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. In this case, the adjustment result image R is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the development notification image or the operation promotion image P. However, in the variable display result derivation period T2, the adjustment result image R is deleted as shown in FIG. 75 (E) even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed.

  In the change effect character display process shown in FIG. 57, when it is determined in S601 that the character is not being displayed, it is determined in S602 whether there is a setting for executing the change effect. At this time, when it is determined that there is a setting for executing the change effect based on the stored content of the hold display data storage unit, the process of S603 is executed. Thereby, for example, the effect image of the character CH1 shown in FIG. 58 (B) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

  Thereafter, for example, a hold display change common effect including an effect such that the effect image of the character CH1 shown in FIG. 58B acts on a predetermined hold display is executed. Subsequently, a hold display change effect according to the presence / absence of the display change and the determination result of the hold display change pattern is executed. For example, when the display change presence / absence determination process (not shown) is determined as “display change present” and the hold display change pattern determination process (not shown) is determined as the first hold display change pattern, As a display mode of the hold display, a hold display change success effect in which the display color changes to blue among the specific colors is executed. On the other hand, when “no display change” is determined in the display change presence / absence determination process (not shown), the hold display change failure effect in which the display mode of the hold display does not change is executed.

  Even when a finalized decorative symbol that is a display result in the decorative symbol variable display is derived, the effect image indicating the character CH1 continues until the display end timing is determined in the processing of S604 shown in FIG. Is displayed. At this time, if it is determined in step S608 that a symbol confirmation command has been received, step S609 is executed. Thereby, in the period when the definitive decorative symbol is derived, the display mode of the effect image indicating the character CH1 becomes the static mode. Subsequently, when variable display of special symbols, decorative symbols, etc. is started based on the number of reserved memories being other than “0”, it is determined that a change start command has been received in the processing of S606 shown in FIG. As a result, the process of S607 is executed. Thereby, the display mode of the effect image showing the character CH1 becomes the action mode triggered by the reception of the change start command that becomes the display control information that can specify that the variable display is started.

  In the period in which the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the small symbol is stopped and displayed, and the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is derived, the effect indicating the character CH1 as the change effect character The display mode of the image is a static mode. By setting the display layer as shown in FIG. 58 (B), the effect image indicating the character CH1 can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side as viewed from the player than the effect image indicating the decoration pattern. Is displayed with higher priority than the effect image indicating. By making the display mode of the effect image showing the character CH1 arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing such a decorative design as a stationary mode, the player can display the decorative design in a variable display. It is possible to clearly recognize that the result has been derived, and to prevent misrecognition of the display result.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the full screen notice effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 69 (B), 71 (B), and 73 (B), the full screen is displayed. Since the variable display is started in the forward direction of the decorative symbol after the execution period of the notice effect, the movement of the decorative symbol can be prevented from becoming difficult to understand. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved.

  The predetermined direction in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is the normal direction. For example, the normal direction includes a basic change direction for variable display of decorative symbols, a direction in which identification information is mainly displaced in variable display, a change direction when there is no notice effect, and a change direction most viewed by the player , And the direction of change when derivation display is performed. That is, it is possible to prevent the start of movement of the decorative pattern in the normal direction from being difficult to understand in variable display.

  In addition, the full-screen notice effect is an effect suggesting an expectation degree of an advantageous state, and thus the expectation of the game can be increased by the notice effect. In addition, since the variable display is started in a predetermined direction of the decorative symbol after the execution period of the full screen notice effect, it is possible to prevent the movement of the decorative symbol from becoming difficult to understand.

  Further, since the image display device 5 can variably display decorative symbols in a specific direction different from the predetermined direction, the direction of variable display becomes diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 69 (B) and 71 (B), the image display device 5 variably displays decorative symbols in a specific direction at least during the execution period of the full screen notice effect, so that the identification information is reversed. After the variable display, the variable display can be variably displayed in the forward direction different from the reverse direction, and the reverse variable display can be a preparation effect for the variable display in the forward direction. In particular, when the specific direction is the reverse direction of the predetermined direction as in the present embodiment, it is possible to variably display in the reverse direction and then variably display it in the predetermined direction with powerful display. Can provide. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved.

  Further, at the start of variable display in a predetermined direction, the interest of the game can be improved by executing a symbol notice effect as shown in FIGS. 70 (B1) and 74 (B1). Further, since a plurality of symbol notice effects are provided, a plurality of symbol notice effects can be executed, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

  Further, when the symbol notice effect and the full screen notice effect are executed, the symbol notice effect is executed as shown in FIG. 70 (D2) and FIG. 74 (D2) after the end of the full screen notice effect. And full-screen previews can be prevented from being executed at the same time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the symbol advance notice effect from becoming unrecognizable or difficult to view due to all the design advance notice effects. In other words, the recognizability of the symbol notice effect can be improved, for example, the player can clearly recognize the symbol notice effect.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above includes adjustment means realized by the effect control CPU 120 in cooperation with each unit, and adjustment image display means. The adjusting means can adjust the effect in accordance with the adjustment operation by the player at least during execution of variable display, and the adjustment image display means displays the adjustment result image R corresponding to the adjustment by the adjusting means for a predetermined period T1. To do. Then, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means makes the adjustment result image R not visible during the variable display result derived display period T2 during the predetermined period T1. Since it did in this way, the fall of the recognition property of the variable display result derived | led-out displayed can be suppressed.

  In addition, although the example which can adjust a volume was demonstrated above, the display effect etc. of the image display apparatus 5 grade | etc., May be sufficient as the presentation effect which can be adjusted. Further, the adjustable presentation effect may be at least one of volume and luminance. The adjustment image may be displayed not only when the volume or the like is changed by the adjustment operation, but also when it is not changed. Further, the adjustment image display means not only makes the adjustment image invisible in the derivation display period T2, but also displays the adjustment image in a translucent manner or blinking in the derivation display period T2. It may be difficult to view. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed. In this case, for example, instead of S712 in FIG. 59, a process for displaying the adjustment result image in a difficult-to-view mode is executed, and the effect effect setting process is modified to return from the display in the difficult-to-view mode in S715. What is necessary is just to comprise.

  In addition, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means cannot visually recognize or difficult to view the adjustment result image R in the variable display result derived display period T2 during the predetermined period T1. The adjustment image may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the specific effect image such as the promotion display image P. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed. In addition, since the adjustment image can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the specific effect image, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of information displayed on the image display device 5. The specific effect image displayed at a position not overlapping the adjustment image is not only the promotion display image P or the development notification image, but also an image showing the character CH1, an image showing the 4th symbol, an image showing the hold display, etc. It may be.

  In addition, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period T1, the adjustment image display means cannot visually recognize or difficult to view the adjustment result image R in the variable display result derived display period T2 during the predetermined period T1. The adjusting means may not adjust the effect related to the error notification. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed. Moreover, since the error sound, the display brightness of the error image, etc. can be kept at the specified values, it is possible to prevent the player or the game store clerk from noticing the occurrence of the error even though some error has occurred. . It should be noted that the effect related to error notification that is not adjusted by the adjusting means may be not only the error volume but also the luminance when an error image is displayed, the luminance of a lamp that is lit when an error occurs, and the like.

  Further, at least a part of the display area of the adjusted image may overlap with at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result. In this way, since the adjusted image result image that overlaps at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result is deleted, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the visibility of the variable display result. Note that the variable display result derivation display area in which at least a part of the adjustment image display area overlaps is not limited to the decorative design display area Ar, and the effect image showing the small design is variably displayed and the display result is derived. It may be a small symbol display area 5V or the like.

  Further, the error image may not be deleted during the derivation display of the variable display result. In this way, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

  Further, the display of the error image may be prioritized over the display of the adjusted image. Even in this case, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

  In addition, the demonstration display is kept visible when the adjustment operation is performed, but the demonstration display may be erased when the menu display operation is performed. By doing so, a demonstration display can be suitably performed.

  In addition, it includes a specific effect execution means capable of displaying a specific effect image during execution of variable display of identification information, and the specific effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of at least a part of the identification information, The specific effect execution means may set the display mode of the specific effect image as a static mode at a position overlapping in front of the identification information during a period in which the variable display result of the identification information is derived. . In this way, misrecognition of the display result can be prevented.

  In addition, the gaming machine performs variable display of the notification information image in synchronization with the variable display of the identification information image in the second region that is always smaller than the first region where the identification information image is displayed, and displays the display result. You may provide the constant display means to derive. In such a configuration, misrecognition of the display result can be prevented.

  Further, the information processing means includes information output means for outputting display control information capable of specifying that variable display is started according to the determination result of the determination means, and the effect execution means is triggered by the reception of the display control information. The display mode may be a non-stationary mode. By doing so, it is possible to prevent misrecognition of the display result while suppressing the uncomfortable feeling of the specific performance.

  Further, the specific effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position at least in front of a part of the identification information image, and the specific effect execution means performs the identification during the period in which the display result of the identification information image is derived. The display mode of the specific effect image may be a temporary stop mode at a position overlapping the front side of the information image. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production while preventing misperception of the display result.

  In addition, the period during which the adjustment image is not visible or difficult to visually recognize is not limited to the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result. The adjustment image may be invisible or difficult to view in the reach action period or the like. In other words, the period during which the adjustment image is not visually recognized may be a predetermined period during which the target that the player wants to recognize is notified. Further, the adjustment image may be displayed at a position where it is superimposed on a specific effect image such as the promotion display image P. Further, the effect related to error notification may be adjustable by the adjusting means. In addition, the display area of the adjustment image may not overlap with the derived display area of the variable display result.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the device configuration, data configuration, processing shown in the flowchart of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the case where the predetermined state is the big hit gaming state is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, other gaming states such as a probable change state, a short time state, and a high base state may be set as the predetermined state. That is, for example, the variable pitching device 43 is configured to be controlled to be in an open state when it is controlled to a certain variation state, or the variable pitching device 43 is controlled to be in an open state when controlled to a short-time state. You may comprise as follows.

  In the above embodiment, on the side of the production control microcomputer 200, the detection signal from the entrance detection switch 19 is input to detect entry to the variable entry device 43, or the solenoid 17 is driven to make variable entry. Although the case where the ball apparatus 43 is controlled to the open state has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, on the game control microcomputer 100 side, a detection signal from the entrance detection switch 19 is input to detect entry into the variable entry device 43, or the solenoid 17 is driven to activate the variable entry device 43. You may comprise so that it may control to an open state.

  In the above-described embodiment, the value of the number of prize balls to be paid out is displayed as the “status display”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the value of the number of prize balls that have already been paid out may be displayed as “status display”. In this case, the status display is changed by counting up the value. Further, instead of the value of the number of prize balls, a meter indicating the value of the number of prize balls may be displayed as “status display”. In this case as well, a change may be made to decrease the gauge of the meter indicating the value of the planned prize ball number, or a change to increase the gauge of the meter indicating the value of the paid-out prize ball number. May be. In addition, the value displayed in the prize ball notification is used as a denominator, and the change of the “status display” is performed by increasing / decreasing the display of the value of the expected prize ball number or the value of the number of paid-out prize balls as a numerator. Also good. Moreover, it is good also as changing a display mode of a character as a change of "status display".

  In the above embodiment, the prize ball notification is performed during the fanfare period, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a prize ball notification may be performed during a change or after a round in a big hit gaming state is started.

  In the above embodiment, the specific notification is performed in the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, specific notification may be performed using speakers 8L and 8R or a predetermined light emitting member.

  In the above embodiment, the specific sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the “special effect”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect using the image display device 5 or a predetermined light emitting member may be executed as a “special effect”.

  In the above-described embodiment, the over-winning for the second and subsequent times is determined not to perform the over-winning notification, thereby “restricting the execution of the specific effect”. However, the specific restriction mode is not limited to this. . For example, when an over-winning is detected for the second time or later, a part of over-winning notification is executed, the over-winning notification is executed with the degree of output being suppressed, or more negative than the first over-winning notification. It is good also as performing an over-winning notification. Specifically, the rainbow light emission control may be performed on the light emitting member when the first over-winning occurs, while the monochromatic light emission control of the light-emitting member may be performed when the second or later over-winning occurs.

  In the above-described embodiment, all remaining values that can be given are notified as “special notification”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a 10R probability variation big hit is provided, if it is a 15R probability variation big hit or a 10R probability variation big hit, “300 GET” is displayed as a special notification in round 9, and if it is a 15R probability variation big hit, further in round 11 “750 GET” may be displayed as a special notification. Note that the timing for performing the special notification is not limited to the start of the next round in which the promotion success effect is executed. For example, another round may be started or a predetermined timing during the round may be used. Good.

  In the above embodiment, the production control microcomputer 200 selects the notification pattern based on the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot type in which the opening mode of the big prize opening in the jackpot and the notification pattern are associated is selected by the game control microcomputer 100 side, and the effect control microcomputer 200 side is associated with the selected jackpot type. Prize ball notification and status display may be performed based on the notification pattern.

  In the above embodiment, the state display is not changed when an overwinning occurs, so that there is no contradiction with the value notified by the prize ball notification, but the state is also displayed when an overwinning occurs. If the state display exceeds the number of award balls previously notified by prize ball notification by changing the display, a predetermined display may be performed so that no contradiction occurs. For example, “∞” may be displayed or special display may be performed.

  In the above embodiment, when Pt2 is selected as the notification pattern, the value of the prize ball display can be switched from “1200” to “2250” based on the detection of one operation during the effective period. There is something, but it is not limited to this. For example, the value of the prize ball display may be switched from “1200” to “2250” based on the detection of two or more predetermined operations, and each time an operation is detected, the prize ball display is performed. It may be one that switches. Moreover, the button effect may not be provided.

  In addition, if the gaming machine is a specific big hit when a predetermined performance occurs, a specific notification indicating that the value to be given is the maximum without performing the button effect when the predetermined performance is executed. It is good also as performing.

  Also, as a specific production example, displaying an enemy character with points during the fanfare period is executed as “notification”, and every time a prize is generated, the enemy characters are defeated and points are awarded. This may be executed as “change in status display”. Further, as a button effect during the fanfare period, each time an operation is detected, the enemy character may be defeated and points may be awarded. Also, a plurality of enemy characters having different points may be provided. For example, a character A with 15 points and a character B with 300 points are provided, and the character A can be defeated by winning one game ball, and the character B has 20 characters. It may be possible to destroy it by winning a game ball.

  In the above-described embodiment, the grand prize opening can be opened only once in one round, but may be opened multiple times. In addition, the opening mode of the special winning opening may be different for each round. For example, the round winning opening may be opened only once for 29.5 seconds in round 1 to round 8, and the winning opening may be opened twice in 0.1 seconds in round 9 to round 15.

  In the above embodiment, a single big prize opening is provided, but a plurality of big prize holes may be provided. For example, it is good also as providing the big prize opening A and the big prize opening B, and making either one big prize opening open state for every round in a big hit.

  In the embodiment described above, one type of prize ball notification and status display is provided, but a plurality of types of prize ball notification and status display may be provided. For example, the types of prize ball notification and status display may be different for each jackpot symbol to be stopped.

  Moreover, you may alert | report the remaining time of the effective period in a button effect. For example, a display such as “3 seconds remaining” may be performed, or a display in which a meter indicating the remaining time of the effective period is decreased may be performed.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 69 (B) and 71 (B), the execution period of the full screen notice effect and the execution period of the reverse direction change completely coincide, that is, the full screen notice. Although the effect and the reverse direction change start at the same timing and end at the same time, as shown in FIG. 76, the execution period of the full-screen notice effect may be shorter than the reverse time change execution period. In FIG. 76, the reverse direction fluctuation starts at the timing when the fluctuation starts and ends at timing T14. In contrast, the full screen notice effect starts at timing T12 later than timing T11 and ends at timing T13 before timing T14. According to the first modification, it is possible to visually recognize the variation of the decorative symbol in the reverse direction during the period from the timing T11 to T12 and the period from the timing T13 to T14. The variation in the decorative pattern in the reverse direction may be visible only during either the period of timing T11 to T12 or the period of timing T13 to T14.

  In the above embodiment, the variation in the reverse direction of the decorative symbol is assumed to vary in the reverse direction by about one decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 70 (C1). In this way, the type of symbol reverse start display can be selected. Specifically, in the second modification, as shown in FIG. 77A, there is a process of determining the type of symbol reverse starting (S523A), and a plurality of types are provided. In the “small” type, the decorative symbol is changed back by one, in the “medium” type, the decorative symbol is changed back by two, and in the “large” type, the decorative symbol is changed back by three. By the process of S523A, one type of reverse direction fluctuation is selected from these three types. Specifically, in the process of S523A, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for design reverse start display type determination, and the extracted numerical data and the reverse design start display shown in FIG. 77 (B). Using the type determination table, the type of the symbol reverse start display, that is, the mode of the reverse direction variation of the decorative symbol is determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 77B, in the case of the non-reach variation pattern, “small” is determined, and in the case of the super reach (loss) variation pattern, “small” is 50% and “medium” is 40. % And “Large” are determined with a probability of 10%, and in the case of a super-reach (big hit) variation pattern, “Small” is determined with a probability of 10%, “Medium” with 30%, and “Large” with a probability of 60%. The The jackpot expectation level is such that the amount of return of the decorative symbol increases in the order of small <medium <large, and it can have a big hit expectation for the type of reverse variation of the decorative symbol, and it is interesting about the symbol reverse start display Can improve the fun of the game.

  Further, a plurality of types of full screen notice effects may be provided, and the type of full screen notice may be selectable. For example, the types of full-screen notice effects include those with different execution periods of full-screen notice effects, those with different transparency, those with different notification contents shown in FIG. 70 (C2), and output sounds that are output when these are displayed. May be different, or may be a combination of two or more of these, and the jackpot expectation may be different. The longer the execution period, the lower the transparency, the higher the notification effect shown in FIG. 70 (C2), the higher the effect, and the higher the output sound or the specific output sound, Good.

  In the embodiment described above, the decorative pattern can be changed in the reverse direction as shown in FIG. 69. However, as shown in FIGS. In the third modification, the reverse direction in S322C shown in FIGS. 63 and 66 may be replaced with rocking, and the reverse direction in S345A and S345B shown in FIG. 68 may be replaced with rocking. In FIG. 78 (A), it is determined that the full screen notice effect is not executed, and at the timing T01, the decorative symbol swing display and the symbol notice effect are started. The symbol notice effect ends at timing T02, and the swing display ends at timing T03. At the end of the swing display, the decorative pattern starts to change in the forward direction. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), from the state in which the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed at the reference position Ref in the previous variation display, as shown in FIG. 79 (B1). In addition to the start of the dynamic display, a symbol notice effect as shown in FIG. 79 (B1), that is, a notice effect in which an aura image G of a predetermined color is displayed around the decorative symbol is also started. Then, at the end of the swing display shown in FIG. 78 (A), the variation in the forward direction of the decorative symbol at the reference position Ref is started as shown in FIG. 79 (D1).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 78 (B), since the full-screen notice effect is determined to be executed, the symbol notice effect is changed from timing T01 as an initial value to timing T03. Looking at the effect execution example at this time, the full-screen notice effect is started as shown in FIG. 79 (B2), and “chance!” Included in the full-screen notice effect as shown in FIG. 79 (C2). Is displayed, and after the full-screen notice effect in FIG. 79 (C2) is completed, that is, when the forward change of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 79 (D2), the sign notice effect is started. Has been changed to That is, the start of the symbol notice effect is changed after the end of the full screen notice effect shown in FIG. 79 (D2), not at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 79 (B1). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the symbol notice effect from being hidden by the full screen notice effect. Note that the decorative symbol swing display is executed without change, but is hidden behind the full-screen notice effect shown in FIGS. 79 (B2) and (C2), and therefore cannot be seen by the player.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63 to FIG. 66, all symbols advance notice effect, symbol advance notice effect, and symbol reverse start display are determined by lottery. However, like the variation pattern shown in FIG. You may make it provide the fluctuation pattern provided with at least one among a production | presentation, a symbol notice production, and a design reverse direction start display.

  In the above-described embodiment, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided on the screen of the image display device 5 to perform variable display of decorative symbols. The description has been made assuming that the small symbol display area 5V is provided and the small symbols are variably displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the small symbol display area 5V is not provided, by displaying an effect image indicating a decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is displayed. The variable display may be executable. Even in this case, the effect image indicating the character or the like that becomes the specific effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image that indicates the decorative pattern that is the identification information image, and the display result in the variable display of the decorative pattern is In the derived period, the display mode of the specific effect image displayed at the position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing the decorative design may be set as the static mode. Thereby, the misrecognition of the display result in the variable display of a decorative design can be prevented.

  Also, instead of variably displaying an effect image showing a decorative pattern, or by displaying an animation of an effect image prepared in advance along with such variable display, it supports variable display of a special symbol in a special symbol game When the display result in the variable display of the special symbol is derived, the animation display of the effect image is interrupted or paused, and the display that can recognize the display result of the variable display is performed. The display result may be derived separately. In this way, it is possible to execute a related display for deriving a display result in relation to the determination result of whether or not to control to an advantageous state, and it is possible to place a specific effect image at an overlapping position ahead of the effect image in this related display In such a case, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a static mode during the period in which the display result in the related display is derived.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display change” is executed, the effect image indicating the character used in the hold display change effect can be displayed over a plurality of variable displays as the specific effect image. Explained that there is. On the other hand, for example, a pre-reading notice effect of “hold display change” and a different look-ahead notice effect different from this can be executed simultaneously over a plurality of variable displays, and characters or the like used in some or all of the pre-reading notice effects are shown. The effect image may be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative design. In this case, among the effect images used in the pre-reading notice effect, the effect image arranged at the overlapping position in front of the identification information image is used as the specific effect image, and a display result is derived whether the variable display is being performed. The display mode may be changed to the action mode or the static mode depending on whether the display mode is a period.

  In the above embodiment, as an example of the specific effect image, the effect image indicating the character used in the hold display change effect has been described. On the other hand, as a specific effect image, display is continued even during a variable display in which decorative display variable display or the like is performed or before the start of variable display and a display result in the variable display is derived. Any effect image may be used. For example, corresponding to a period in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probabilistic state, the effect image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays is located at a position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing a decorative design. May also be displayed in a dispositionable manner. Alternatively, an effect image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays corresponding to a period in which the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special effect mode different from the normal effect mode is more than an effect image showing a decorative pattern. May also be displayed so as to be arranged at overlapping positions on the front side. In this way, as the specific effect image, an effect image showing a special character or the like over a plurality of variable displays is displayed so that it can be placed at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the decorative design. During the period in which the display result is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be a static mode.

  The effect image indicating the character may be an effect image indicating, for example, a person or animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. During variable display in which variable display of decorative symbols or the like is executed, the display mode of the specific effect image may be set as the action mode by reproducing and displaying the moving image as the specific effect image. In this case, during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display mode of the specific effect image may be set to the static mode by temporarily stopping the reproduction of the moving image.

  When the effect image indicating one decorative design is the identification information image, the effect image that is the specific effect image is arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating a part of the one decorative image. It may be a thing, and may be arrange | positioned in the position which overlaps ahead rather than the production image which shows the whole of one decoration design. When an effect image showing a plurality of decorative symbols is an identification information image, the effect image that is the specific effect image is a position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing some of the decorative symbols among the plurality of decorative symbols It may be arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing all the decorative symbols.

  The type and part of the identification information image on which the effect image that is the specific effect image can be arranged on the front side may be different depending on at least one of the gaming state and the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, the specific effect image is located at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative symbol regardless of whether the decorative symbol is a normal symbol or a probable variable symbol. It is possible to arrange the effect image. On the other hand, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probabilistic state, it is possible to place an effect image that becomes a specific effect image at a position that overlaps in front of an effect image that shows a normal symbol among a plurality of decorative symbols. On the other hand, the effect image serving as the specific effect image may not be arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the effect image showing the probability variation pattern among the plurality of decorative symbols. In this case, when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the player's attention that the probability variation state is derived as a jackpot combination and the probability variation state continues is prevented from being hindered by the display of the specific effect image. This can improve the fun of gaming.

  Further, for example, when the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal effect mode, an effect image that becomes a specific effect image is provided at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the decorative symbol, regardless of the symbol number of the decorative symbol. It can be placed. On the other hand, when the production state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a special production mode different from the normal production mode over a plurality of variable displays, for example, a decorative design with a specific design number associated with a specific person is shown. The effect image that becomes the specific effect image may not be arranged at the overlapping position in front of the effect image. Thus, the specific effect image may be any image that can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of at least a part of the identification information image.

  In the above-described embodiment, the description has been made assuming that the display mode is set to the static mode for all the effect images to be the specific effect image during the period in which the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbols or the like to be the identification information image is derived. On the other hand, at least a part of the specific effect image arranged at the overlapping position on the front side of the effect image of the decorative design may be anything that can change the display mode to the static mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, during the period in which the display result of variable display of decorative symbols and the like is derived, the display of effect symbols that become specific effect images that are arranged at overlapping positions ahead of the effect image showing the decorative symbols The embodiment has been described as being a stationary embodiment. On the other hand, when there is an effect image arranged behind the effect image showing the decorative design, during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the variable display of the decorative design is executed. The rear arrangement image may be displayed in the same display manner as in FIG. For example, a background image display layer is provided as a display layer that is assigned a value larger than the Z value of the effect image drawn on the decorative design display layer shown in FIG. Also good. An effect image that is a background image is drawn on the background image layer. The Z value may be set so that the background image display layer is arranged on the most rear side when viewed from the player. In this case, during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display mode of the effect image serving as the background image arranged at the position overlapping the rear side of the effect image indicating the decorative design or the position not overlapping is variable. The display mode may be the same as that during display. As a result, an effect image that may cause misrecognition in the display result, such as a specific effect image, is set to a static mode, while an effect image that does not cause misrecognition of the display result, such as a background image, is displayed in the same manner as during variable display. By setting it as an aspect, the uncomfortable feeling with respect to the display of an effect image can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, during the variable display in which the decorative display variable display or the like is executed, the display mode of the effect image as the specific effect image is set as the action mode, while the display result in the variable display is derived. In the above description, it is assumed that the display mode of the effect image that is the specific effect image arranged on the front side of the effect image that shows the decorative pattern that is the identification information image is the still image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the period in which the display result in the variable display is derived, the display of the effect image that is the specific effect image arranged at the overlapping position in front of the effect image showing the decorative design The mode may be an idling mode different from the static mode. The idling mode may be a temporary stop mode that is set such that the display mode of the specific effect image is different from the action mode in the above-described embodiment within a range in which the display result is not misidentified.

  In addition, during variable display in which decorative display variable display or the like is performed, for example, an effect image that informs a message of “changed symbol” as a character line may be displayed as the specific effect image. On the other hand, in the period in which the display result in the decorative display or the like of the decorative symbol is derived, for example, an effect image that informs the message of “design confirmation” as a character line may be displayed as the specific effect image. In this way, depending on whether the variable display is being performed or the display result is derived, it is possible to change the display mode of the specific effect image by changing the content of the message that is notified as the character dialogue. Also good.

  When an effect image showing a character consisting of a plurality of parts is displayed as a specific effect image, a display mode different from that during variable display in which a variable display of decorative symbols is executed in a period in which a display result in variable display is derived The specific effect image may be displayed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that does not perform variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. As an example, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed through the start prize opening provided in the game area, the variable prize device provided in the game area is changed from the closed state to the open state, The game ball that has entered the inside may be configured to be controlled to a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player when entering a specific area of the plurality of areas. In such a configuration, the result of determining whether or not to change the variable winning device to the first state based on the detection of the game ball that has passed through the start winning opening, and the change when changing to the first state Display result in relation to at least one of the determination result that the aspect is one of a plurality of aspects, or the determination result of whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state according to the passing situation of the game ball inside the variable winning device In the period when the display result in the related display is derived when the related effect can be executed and the specific effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position in front of the effect image in the related display. The display mode of the image may be a static mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, it is described that the variable display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special gaming state such as a probability variation state may be an advantageous state, and the upper limit number of rounds that can be executed among a plurality of big hit gaming states is greater than the second round number. The big hit gaming state which is the number of rounds may be an advantageous state. Alternatively, the short time state in which the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed among the plurality of short time states is a first number greater than the second number may be an advantageous state, and the big hit probability is the second among the plurality of probability variation states. A probability variation state having a first probability higher than the probability may be set as an advantageous state. Any other game state that is advantageous to the player may be used.

  When the hold display change effect is executed, a limit effect that restricts the hold display may be executed. For example, the limited effect is to display an effect image for display limitation in the display area of the image display device 5, and to perform translucent display, transparent display, or reduced display on the first hold display unit 5HL or the second hold display unit 5HR. In other words, by making the production model move from the retracted state to the advanced state and concealing the reserved display when the advanced model is in the advanced state, a part or all of the reserved display may be invisible or difficult for the player to see. What is necessary is just to restrict.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration for suppressing misunderstanding that the player has lost the game as in the first embodiment, and the identification information as in the second embodiment. It may be related to a configuration that prevents the movement from becoming difficult to understand and improves the fun of the game. That is, as in the first embodiment, when the game medium passes through the predetermined area, the variable display is started and the game medium is given, and when the game medium passes through the special area, the variable display is In the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with a special discharge area for discharging a game medium that has not been started but has been given a game medium and has passed through the special area but has not entered the special entry section, a variable display is provided as a notice effect. When the predetermined notice effect that makes the display mode of the identification information invisible or difficult to be recognized can be executed at the start of the identification information, and the predetermined notice effect is executed, the identification information in the predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined notice effect The variable display may be started. According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to suppress misunderstanding that a player has been damaged, but also to prevent the movement of identification information from becoming difficult to understand and improve the interest of the game. Can be made.

  Alternatively, as in the first embodiment, when the game medium passes through the predetermined area, the variable display is started and the game medium is given, and when the game medium passes through the special area, the variable display is In the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with a special discharge area for discharging a game medium that has not been started but has been given a game medium and has passed through the special area but has not entered the special entry section, the special area or the special entry section In response to the passing of the game medium, the right to execute a predetermined notice effect that makes the display mode of the identification information invisible or difficult to view at the start of variable display executed thereafter is stocked, and a predetermined area is played. When variable display is executed in response to the passage of the medium, if the right to execute a predetermined notice effect is stocked, the predetermined notice effect is executed and the execution of the predetermined notice effect is performed. It may be started the variable display of the identification information to a predetermined direction after a period of time. According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to suppress misunderstanding that the player has lost, but also to prevent the movement of the identification information from becoming difficult to understand. Moreover, not only can the interest of the game be improved, but also the expectation for the game medium to pass through the special area and the special entry portion can be improved.

  Alternatively, as in the first embodiment, when the game medium passes through the predetermined area, the variable display is started and the game medium is given, and when the game medium passes through the special area, the variable display is In the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with a special discharge area for discharging a game medium that has not been started but has been given a game medium and has passed through the special area but has not entered the special entry section, the game medium is placed in the special area. A predetermined notice effect that makes the display of the special identification information invisible or difficult to see at the start of variable display of the special identification information as a notice effect is made possible to execute variable display of the special identification information according to passing. When the predetermined notice effect is executed, it may be possible to start the variable display of the special identification information in a predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined notice effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to prevent misunderstanding that the player has lost, but also to improve the expectation that the game medium will pass through the special area. It is also possible to prevent the movement of the special identification information from becoming difficult to understand.

  In the above embodiment, “probability variation” is included in the jackpot type determined in the processing of S242 shown in FIG. 51, and the probability variation control condition is established based on the determination result of the jackpot type being “probability variation”. In the above description, it is assumed that the jackpot game state is controlled to be in a probable change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation control condition is established based on the fact that the probability change attacker provided at the predetermined position in the game area has detected the game ball that won the big prize opening by the probability variation detection switch, The gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state may be controlled to the probability changing state. The winning hole of the probability variation attacker can change from a closed state to an open state when the number of round games executed in the big hit game state is a predetermined number of times, and is closed when the number of round games executed is other than the predetermined number of times. The open state may not be changed while the state is maintained. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific area in the attacker that is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the game area. You may be comprised so that it may become.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is provided with only a probable big hit such as a 15R probable big hit or an 8R probable big hit is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the configuration shown in the above embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled only in the short-time state after the jackpot game is finished and has a normal jackpot type that is not controlled in the probability variation state as a jackpot type.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and decorative symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed has been described. However, variable display is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the variation control pattern 200 indicating the variation pattern such as the variation time, the type of reach production, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuity, and the like to the production control microcomputer 200, one variation pattern is used when the variation starts. Although an example in which a command is transmitted has been shown, a change pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 200 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notification by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 indicates the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before reaching, such as the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream and the presence or absence of a slip effect, in the first command. A command may be transmitted, and in the second command, a command indicating a variation time and a variation mode after reaching reach, such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a redrawing effect, may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 200 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 200 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When two commands are sent, the two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is transmitted, the second command is transmitted after a predetermined period has elapsed. You may do it. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, but the circuit for controlling the effect device is a single substrate. May be installed. Furthermore, two boards, a first effect control board on which a circuit for controlling the image display device 5 and the like is mounted and a second effect control board on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices is mounted, are provided. May be.

  In the above-described embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to the ratio that is different in the relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. = 100%: This is a concept that includes those with different ratios such as 0%.

  In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but the game control microcomputer 100 transmits an effect control command to another board. You may make it transmit to the microcomputer 200 for effect control in the effect control board 12 via another board | substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the image display device 5. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 200 performs the display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 100 in the above embodiment, and the sound control board 13 and the lamp control. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 14 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the above-described embodiment, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is a big hit or a variation pattern type is determined upon winning, a command indicating the winning determination result is transmitted, and the production control microcomputer 200 is determined. In the above, a case is shown in which the pre-reading notice effect is executed based on the command indicating the determination result at the time of winning, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the determination at the winning time is performed on the effect control microcomputer 200 side. It may be configured. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a command for designating only the value of the jackpot determination random number or the variation pattern type determination random number extracted when the start winning is generated, and the effect control microcomputer 200 is transmitted. On the side, a determination may be made at the time of winning based on a random number value designated by these commands.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. It is also possible to apply to a slot machine where a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the stop button operation by the player It is.

  In the above embodiment, a game machine that uses a game medium is taken as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media, and a game such as a game ball. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a medium and gives a score when a prize giving condition is satisfied.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine. Instead of this, a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a computer device may be adopted. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 4A 1st special symbol display apparatus 4B 2nd special symbol display apparatus 5 Image display apparatus 6A Normal winning ball apparatus 6B Normal variable winning ball apparatus 7 Special variable winning ball apparatus 8L Speaker 8R Speaker 12 Effect control board 41 1st Out port 42 Second out port 43 Variable pitching device 11 Main board 33 Normal winning gate 50 Winning prize 70 Audio output board 100 Game control microcomputer 103 CPU
200 Production Control Microcomputer 120 Production Control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
Variable display means for performing variable display of identification information in a predetermined direction;
A notice effect execution means for executing the notice effect,
Specific production execution means for executing the specific production;
A predetermined area through which game media can pass;
A special area different from the predetermined area through which game media can pass,
A special entry part that can enter after the game medium passes through the special area ;
A special discharge area for discharging game media that have passed through the special area but have not entered the special entry section;
With
When the game medium passes through the predetermined area, the variable display is started and the game medium is given,
When the game medium passes through the special area, the variable display is not started while the game medium is given,
The notice effect execution means can execute a predetermined notice effect that makes the display mode of the identification information invisible or difficult to see at the start of variable display as the notice effect.
The variable display means can start variable display of identification information in the predetermined direction after the execution period of the predetermined notice effect when the predetermined notice effect is executed,
The specific effect executing means is
The specific effect can be executed in a common display area with the predetermined notice effect,
When the predetermined notice effect is executed, the specific effect can be executed at a first timing,
The specific effect can be executed at a second timing different from the first timing when the predetermined notice effect is not executed.
The gaming machine which is characterized a call.

Images